Grc/Eia/Sep-2020/01

Final Environmental Impact Assessment & Environmental Management Plan

“Expansion of Sponge Iron Production from 60,000 TPA to 1,20,000 TPA Along with Captive Power Plant of 15 MW, M S Billets Production of (1,35,000 TPA) by Installing 3 x 15 Ton Induction Furnace, and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA)”

Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt. -Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal, Pincode-713347,

Category – ‘A’ Project

Schedule – 3 (a), Metallurgical industries (ferrous & Non-ferrous) & Sector-8 as per QCI/NABET Scheme (Study Period – 17th December-2019 to 16th March-2020) (Additional Study – October-2020)

(Submission - June 2021)

Client:- M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited. 20B, Abdul Hamid Street, East India House, 7th Floor, Block-7A, Kolkata-700069, WB

PREPARED BY: GRASS ROOTS RESEARCH & CREATION INDIA (P) LTD. (QCI/NABET ACCREDITED NO. NABET/EIA/1821/SA 0110) F-374 & 375, Sector-63, Noida, U.P. Ph.: 0120- 4044630, Telefax: 0120- 2406519 Email: [email protected] Website: http://www.grc-india.com GRC INDIA TRAINING & ANALYTICAL LABORATORY (NABL ACCREDITED & MOEFCC NO. S.O. 388 (E)) A unit of GRC India GRC/EIA/SEP-2020/01

APPENDIX

S. No. Functional Areas Name of the Expert Involvement (period and task)  Identifying the sources of emissions and mitigation measures.  Inventorisation of point source stack emission Dr. J.K Moitra details. 1. FAE-AP  Site specific micrometeorology monitoring. Dr Dhiraj Kr Singh  Ambient Air Quality (AAQ)monitoring impact predictions and mitigations (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)  Surface water and ground water quality monitoring and assessment. impacts on water  Environment and mitigations. 2. FAE-WP Dr Dhiraj Kr Singh  Identification, characterization of effluent streams and treatments thereof.  Water balance and conservation measures (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)  Non-hazardous solid, wastes generation, recycling and disposal. 3. FAE-SHW Dr. J.K Moitra  Storage and management of hazardous solid waste (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)  Determination of baseline human environment.  Impact on socioeconomic environment & mitigation 4. SE Mr. B. N. Chaudhari methods. (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)  Biological environment status in respect of terrestrial fauna and aquatic eco system. 5. EB Dr. Ashok Kr Rathoure  Impact on ecological environment. (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)  Ground water resource assessment.  Impact on ground water potential and mitigation 6. HG Prof. Tapan Majumdar measures for avoiding ground water contamination. (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)  Topography and geological aspects 7. GEO Prof. Tapan Majumder  Developing geological maps (July, 2018 to June, 2019)  Monitoring, analysis & characterization of soil.  Assessment of impact on soil quality and mitigation 8. SC Mr. N.P.S. Varde measures. (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)  Processing of Site-specific micrometeorological data.  Collection and use of inversion/ mixing height data Dr. J.K Moitra 9. AQ for modeling.

 Air dispersion modeling for prediction of GLCS due to PM10, SO2 and NOx. (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)

 Analysis of ambient noise quality data. 10. NV Mr D.P Biswari  Impact due to plant noise and abatement measures. (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)

 Analysis of data related to land-use pattern.  Land-use map development. Mr. N P S Varde 11. LU  Impact on land environment in respect to land form Mr. B N Chaudhari change. (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)  Identification of hazard prone areas.  Environmental risk evaluation. 12. RH Dr. J.K Moitra  On-site and Off-site emergency planning. (Sep, 2020 to June, 2021)

ii.

SATYAM IRON & STEEL CO. PVT. LTD. CIN: U00331WB2000PTC132700 Registered Office WORKS: 208, Abdul Hamid Street, G-7, Mangalpur Industrial Area, 7th Floor, Block-7A, Kolkata-700069 P.O. Raniganj-713347, Dist. Paschim Bardhaman (W.B.} � 033-22137518, 22137519, Telefax: 22137520 E-mail : [email protected], [email protected] n

Annexure-II UNDERTAKING

(As per OM No:- J.11013/41/200/IA-II (1) Dated:- 5-10-2011 by MoEFCC, New Delhi, Govt. oflndia)

I. Mr. Gopal Kumar Agarwal, Director of M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited., give this undertaking to the effect that conditions laid down in ToR prescribed by MoEF&CC, New Delhi vide letter No.J-11011/253/2020-IA.II(l),Dated:-26.10.2020 for preparation of EIA for Proposed Expansion of Sponge Iron Production from 60,000 TPA to 1, 20,000 TPA along with Captive Power Plant of 15 MW, M S Billets Production of (1, 35,000 TPA) by Installing 3 x 15 Ton Induction Furnace, and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA) at Plot No G-7, B-7 /11 & G-7 /A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS - Raniganj, Distt.-Paschim Bardhaman, Pinco

In order to assess the likely impacts of the proposed project M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited authorities entrusted M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd, Noida to facilitate in the process of Environmental Impact Assessment [EIA) for various environmental attributes which are likely to be affected and to prepare a detailed Environmental Management Plan (EMP).

Information and data on Project Technical Details, Land, Water, Fuel, Pollution Mitigation Measures, Stack Details, Project Cost Project, layout Plan and location Maps used in this EIA Report has been given by M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited. The Final EIA Report is approved by M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited for submission to MOEF&CC, New Delhi for Environmental Clearance.

We hereby submitting undertaking on 13.04.2021 to MOEF&CC as per OM No:- J.11013 /41/2006/IA-ll (1), Dated:- 5-10-2011 that the contents and information submitted in this EIA report is owned by M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited. The EIA Report fully complies with all the points mentioned in the TOR prescribed by MOEF&CC. The data submitted in this EIA Report is true and factually correct.

Thanking You, SATYAMIRON & STEEL CO. PVT. LT(t

�--�v--irJ l l-. Gopal Kumar Agarwatector Director No.J-11011/253/2020-IA.II(I) Goverment of India Minister of Enviroment,Forest and Climate Change Impact Assessment Division ***

Indira Paryavaran Bhavan, Vayu Wing,3rd Floor,Aliganj, Jor Bagh Road,New Delhi-110003 26 Oct 2020

To,

M/s SATYAM IRON AND STEEL CO. PVT. LTD. 20B, British India Street, Block No.-7A, 7th Floor, Kolkata-700069, Kolkata-700069 West Bengal

Tel.No.033-22137518; Email:[email protected]

Sir/Madam,

This has reference to the proposal submitted in the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change to prescribe the Terms of Reference (TOR) for undertaking detailed EIA study for the purpose of obtaining Environmental Clearance in accordance with the provisions of the EIA Notification, 2006. For this purpose, the proponent had submitted online information in the prescribed format (Form-1 ) along with a Pre-feasibility Report. The details of the proposal are given below:

1. Proposal No.: IA/WB/IND/171518/2020

Expansion of Sponge Iron Production from 60,000 TPA to 1,20,000 TPA along with Captive Power Plant of 15 MW, M S Billets Production (1,35,000 TPA) by Installing 3 x 15 Ton Induction Furnace, and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 2. Name of the Proposal: TPA) at Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal-713347 by M/s. Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited

3. Category of the Proposal: Industrial Projects - 1

4. Project/Activity applied for: 3(a) Metallurgical industries (ferrous & non ferrous)

5. Date of submission for TOR: 06 Oct 2020 In this regard, under the provisions of the EIA Notification 2006 as amended, the Standard TOR for the purpose of preparing environment impact assessment report and environment management plan for obtaining prior environment clearance is prescribed with public consultation as follows: STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

3(a):STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR CONDUCTING ENVIRONMENT IMPACT ASSESSMENT STUDY FOR METALLURGICAL INDUSTRIES (FERROUS & NON FERROUS) PROJECTS AND INFORMATION TO BE INCLUDED IN EIA/EMP REPORT

A. STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR)

1) Executive Summary 2) Introduction i. Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET accreditation ii. Information about the project proponent iii. Importance and benefits of the project

3) Project Description i. Cost of project and time of completion. ii. Products with capacities for the proposed project. iii. If expansion project, details of existing products with capacities and whether adequate land is available for expansion, reference of earlier EC if any. iv. List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of transportation. v. Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage capacities vi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation and their management. vii. Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water balance diagram, man-power requirement (regular and contract) viii. Process description along with major equipments and machineries, process flow sheet (quantative) from raw material to products to be provided ix. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems. x. Expansion/modernization proposals: a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s) including Amendments thereto obtained for the project from MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached as an Annexure. A certified copy of the latest Monitoring Report of the Regional Office of the Ministry of Environment and Forests as per circular dated 30th May, 2012 on the status of compliance of conditions stipulated in all the existing environmental clearances including Amendments shall be provided. In addition, status of compliance of Consent to Operate for the ongoing Iexisting operation of the project from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA-EMP report. STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

b. In case the existing project has not obtained environmental clearance, reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA Notification 1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided. Copies of Consent to Establish/No Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate (in case of units operating prior to EIA Notification 2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB shall be submitted. Further, compliance report to the conditions of consents from the SPCB shall be submitted. 4) Site Details i. Location of the project site covering village, Taluka/Tehsil, District and State, Justification for selecting the site, whether other sites were considered. ii. A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km and site location on 1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet. (including all eco-sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive places) iii. Details w.r.t. option analysis for selection of site iv. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site. v. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site. vi. Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. If located within an Industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial Area indicating location of unit within the Industrial area/Estate. vii. Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) plant site. If existing, show photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in particular. viii. Landuse break-up of total land of the project site (identified and acquired), government/ private - agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies, settlements, etc shall be included. (not required for industrial area) ix. A list of major industries with name and type within study area (10km radius) shall be incorporated. Land use details of the study area x. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area shall be included. xi. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius of study area. If the site is within 1 km radius of any major river, peak and lean season river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of Flood Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level of the river shall also be provided. (mega green field projects) xii. Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of the acquisition process and expected time of complete possession of the land. xiii. R&R details in respect of land in line with state Government policy 5) Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable): i. Permission and approval for the use of forest land (forestry clearance), if any, and recommendations of the State Forest Department. (if applicable) ii. Landuse map based on High resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed site delineating the forestland (in case of projects involving forest land more than 40 ha) STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

iii. Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I forestry clearance along with latest status shall be submitted. iv. The projects to be located within 10 km of the National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals, the project proponent shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features vis-à-vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon v. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Warden of the State Government for conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in the study area vi. Copy of application submitted for clearance under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife 6) Environmental Status i. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and site-specific micrometeorological data using temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall. ii. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX, CO and other parameters relevant to the project shall be collected. The monitoring stations shall be based CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests. iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all stations as per frequency given in the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with - min., max., average and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters from data of all AAQ stations should be provided as an annexure to the EIA Report. iv. Surface water quality of nearby River (100m upstream and downstream of discharge point) and other surface drains at eight locations as per CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines. v. Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river identified by the CPCB/MoEF&CC, if yes give details. vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall be included. vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study area. viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines. ix. Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency of vehicles for transportation of materials, additional traffic due to proposed project, parking arrangement etc. x. Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the study area shall be given with special reference to rare, endemic and endangered species. If Schedule- I fauna are found within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan shall be prepared and furnished. xi. Socio-economic status of the study area. STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

7) Impact and Environment Management Plan i. Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the stack emission based on site-specific meteorological features. In case the project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modelling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain characteristics for determining the potential impacts of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be assessed. Details of the model used and the input data used for modelling shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any. ii. Water Quality modelling - in case of discharge in water body iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on the surrounding environment shall be assessed and provided. In this regard, options for transport of raw materials and finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail-cum road transport or conveyor- cum-rail transport shall be examined. iv. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plant operations, extent recycled and reused for different purposes shall be included. Complete scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of discharge under E(P) Rules. v. Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emissions to meet standards. vi. Measures for fugitive emission control vii. Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization and management. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and hazardous waste in cement plant shall also be included. EMP shall include the concept of waste-minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques, Energy conservation, and natural resource conservation. viii. Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of action shall be provided. ix. Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation, planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the project shall also be incorporated. x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site shall be submitted to harvest rainwater from the roof tops and storm water drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources. xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental pollution control measures shall be included. xii. Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring shall be submitted. STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural and Man-made) Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan including Risk Assessment and damage control. Disaster management plan should be linked with District Disaster Management Plan. 8) Occupational health i. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety of all contract and casual workers ii. Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the workers' health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding last month analyzed data of above mentioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department wise. iii. Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the exposure levels of hazards and whether they are within Permissible Exposure level (PEL). If these are not within PEL, what measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL so that health of the workers can be preserved, iv. Annual report of heath status of workers with special reference to Occupational Health and Safety. 9) Corporate Environment Policy i. Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report. ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process / procedures to bring into focus any infringement / deviation / violation of the environmental or forest norms / conditions? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA. iii. What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given. iv. Does the company have system of reporting of non compliances / violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the company and / or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report 10) Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the labour force during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.

11) Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) i. Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of the project cost) shall be earmarked towards the Enterprise Social Commitment based on Public Hearing issues and item-wise details along with time STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

bound action plan shall be included. Socio-economic development activities need to be elaborated upon. 12) Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance/ATR to the notice(s) and present status of the case. 13) 'A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above TOR.

B. SPECIFIC TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR EIASTUDIES FOR METALLURGICAL INDUSTRIES (FERROUS & NON FERROUS)

1) Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its processes and operations, along with material and energy inputs & outputs (material and energy balance). 2) Details on blast furnace/ open hearth furnace/ basic oxygen furnace/ladle refining, casting and rolling plants etc. 3) Details on installation/activation of opacity meters with recording with proper calibration system 4) Details on toxic metals including mercury, arsenic and fluoride emissions 5) Details on stack height requirement for integrated steel 6) Details on ash disposal and management -Non-ferrous metal 7) Complete process flow diagram describing production of lead/zinc/copper/ aluminium, etc. 8) Raw materials substitution or elimination 9) Details on smelting, thermal refining, melting, slag fuming, and Waelz kiln operation 10) Details on Holding and de-gassing of molten metal from primary and secondary aluminum, materials pre-treatment, and from melting and smelting of secondary aluminium 11) Details on solvent recycling 12) Details on precious metals recovery 13) Details on composition, generation and utilization of waste/fuel gases from coke oven plant and their utilization. 14) Details on toxic metal content in the waste material and its composition and end use (particularly of slag). 15) Trace metals Mercury, arsenic and fluoride emissions in the raw material. 16) Trace metals in waste material especially slag. 17) Plan for trace metal recovery 18) Trace metals in water STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE (TOR) FOR EIA/EMP REPORT FOR PROJECTS/ ACTIVITIES REQUIRING ENVIRONMENT CLEARANCE

C. ADDITIONAL TOR FOR INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT

1). Iron ore/coal linkage documents along with the status of environmental clearance of iron ore and coal mines 2). Quantum of production of coal and iron ore from coal & iron ore mines and the projects they cater to. Mode of transportation to the plant and its impact 3). For Large ISPs, a 3-D view i.e. DEM (Digital Elevation Model) for the area in 10 km radius from the proposal site. MRL details of project site and RL of nearby sources of water shall be indicated. 4). Recent land-use map based on satellite imagery. High-resolution satellite image data having 1m-5m spatial resolution like quickbird, Ikonos, IRS P-6 pan sharpened etc. for the 10 Km radius area from proposed site. The same shall be used for land used/land-cover mapping of the area. 5). Respirable Suspended particulate matter (RSPM) present in the ambient air must be analysed for source analysis - natural dust/RSPM generated from plant operations (trace elements). The RSPM shall also be analysed for presence of poly-aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH), i.e. Benzene soluble fraction, where applicable. Chemical characterization of RSPM and incorporating of RSPM data. 6). All stock piles will have to be on top of a stable liner to avoid leaching of materials to ground water. 7). Plan for the implementation of the recommendations made for the steel plants in the CREP guidelines. 8). Plan for slag utilization 9). Plan for utilization of energy in off gases (coke oven, blast furnace) 10). System of coke quenching adopted with justification.

*** Final EIA/EMP Report of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1, 20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal.

TERMS OF REFERENCE – STATUS OF COMPLIANCE F. No. J-11011/253/2020 – IA.II (I) Dated: - 26th October, 2020

S. No. TOR Point Reply Citation 1. Executive Summary is attached Kindly Refer to Annexure-VII. with EIA report.

2. Introduction I Details of the EIA Consultant Grass Roots Research and Creation Kindly Refer to Chapter # 12 of EIA including NABET accreditation India (P) Ltd., is an accredited Report. organization by Quality Council of India/NABET certificate no. Page No – 174 to 176 NABET/EIA/1821/SA-0110 and NABET accreditation certificate is incorporated Copy of Certificate attached as in EIA Report. Annexure-VI. II Information about the project M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd, has Kindly Refer to Table No - 1.1 in proponent taken a decision for Expansion of Sponge Chapter # 1 of EIA Report. iron production from 60,000 TPA to 1,20,000 TPA along with Captive Power Page No - 1 Plant (15 MW) and additional facility of MS Billets Production (1,35,000 TPA), and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal -713347.

M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited Final EIA/EMP Report of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1, 20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal.

iii Importance and benefits of the ---- Kindly Refer to Item No - 1.3.3 in project Chapter # 1 of EIA Report. Page No – 4 3. Project Description I. Cost of project and time of Total Project cost is INR 171 Cr. The time Kindly Refer to Item No – 2.4.2 at completion. of the completion for the expansion of Page No-17 and Item No – 2.6 at Page project will be 12 months after grant of No-21 in Chapter # 2 of EIA Report all pre requite approval. II. Product with capacities for the Sponge iron 1,20,000 TPA along with Kindly Refer to Table No - 1.1 in proposed project. Captive Power Plant (15 MW) Chapter # 1 of EIA Report. MS Billets Production = 1,35,000 TPA Rolling Mill = 60,000 TPA Page No - 1 III. If expansion project, details of Project was started in 2002, for Kindly Refer to Table No - 1.1 in existing products with capacities production of Sponge Iron of total Chapter # 1 of EIA Report. and whether adequate land is capacity 60,000 TPA. available for expansion, reference CTO has been obtained from WBPCB vide Page No – 1 of earlier EC if any. Letter No-C0118221, dated:-22.04.219, which is valid till 30.04.2024. Copy of CTO enclosed as Annexure-I Total available land is 8.30 Ha. IV. List of raw materials required The Major raw and only material is Kindly Refer to Item No – 2.4.6 in and their source along with mode required for projects are Iron Ore Lumps, Chapter # 2 of EIA Report. of transportation. Coal, Dolomite, MS Scrap, Pig Iron and Billets. Page No – 19 to 20 V. Other chemicals and materials There are no any chemicals used in required with quantities and process. Only Lab chemical used for storage capacities. laboratory testing.

VI. Details of Emission, effluents, There will be no discharge of waste Kindly Refer to Item No – 2.9 in hazardous waste generation and water from the plant as Zero effluent Chapter # 2 of EIA Report. their management. discharge will be adopted. There will not be any generation of Page No- 28 to 31. hazardous waste. VII. Requirement of water, power, Total Water requirement will be 656 KLD Kindly Refer to Item No-2.4.4 in with source of supply, status of and will be sourced from Asansol Municipal Chapter # 2 of EIA Report. approval, water balance diagram, Corporation. Permission for the same has manpower requirement (regular been obtained vide Letter No- Page No-18 and contract) 2718/PW/Eng/19 dated: -28.01.2019 also applied for additional water supply to

Asansol Durgapur Development Authority.

Existing power requirement is 0.60 MW and additionally 20.5 MW power will be Kindly Refer to Item No-2.4.5 in required for the expansion project and Chapter # 2 of EIA Report 15 MW will be will be sourced form CPP Page No-19 and remaining will be from government supply.

There will be employment of 170 during the operation phase of the expansion of Kindly Refer to Item No-2.5 in project and existing 130 peoples are Chapter # 2 of EIA Report. working which include manager, Page No-20 supervisor, etc. During the construction phase of the project, 50-70 persons will

get the temporary employment. VIII. The Project Proponent shall Source of the water will be Asansol Water Permission is enclosed as furnish the requisite documents Durgapur Development Authority. Annexure-II. from the competent authority in support of drawl of ground water and surface water and supply of electricity. IX. Process description along with Process description of production of Kindly Refer to Item No-2.7 in major equipments and Sponge Iron, Billets and rolling mill are Chapter # 2 of EIA Report. machineries, process flow sheet given in EIA report. (quantitative) from raw material Page No-21to 27 to product to provided. X. Hazard identification and details Details are given in FEAI report. Kindly Refer to Item No-2.9.3 in of proposed safety systems. Chapter # 2 of EIA Report. Page No-30 to 31. XI. Expansion /modernization proposals : a. Copy of all the Environmental Project was started in 2002, for Copy of the existing CTO is enclosed as Clearance(s) including production of Sponge Iron of total Annexure-I. Amendments there to be capacity 60,000 TPA at that time obtained for the project from Environment Clearance was not MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached applicable for the said project. So, we had as an Annexure. A certified copy obtained Consent to Operate from of the latest Monitoring Report Pollution Control Board vide Letter No- of the Regional Office of the C0118221, which is valid upto

Ministry of Environment and 20.04.2024 and started production of Forest as per circular dated 30th Sponge Iron. May, 2012 on the status of compliances of conditions Company obtained certified compliance Copy of CTO compliance is enclosed as stipulated in all the existing report of existing CTO from SPCB. Annexure-VIII environmental clearance including Amendments shall be provide. In addition, status of compliance of Consent to Operate for the ongoing existing operation of the project from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA-EMP report. b. In case the existing project Project was started in 2002, for Copy of the existing CTO is enclosed as has not obtained production of Sponge Iron of total Annexure-I. environmental clearance, capacity 60,000 TPA at that time reasons for not taking EC under Environment Clearance was not the provisions of the EIA applicable for the said project. So, we had Notification 1994 and/or obtained Consent to Operate from Notification 2006 shall be Pollution Control Board and started provided. Copies of Consent of production of Sponge Iron. Establish/No Objection Certificate and Consent to Operate ( in case of units operating prior to EIA Notification 2006, CTE and CTO

of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB shall be submitted. Further, compliance report to the conditions of consents from the SPCB shall be submitted. 4. Site Details I. Location of the project site Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Kindly Refer to Item No-1.3.2 in covering village, Taluka/Tehsil, Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Chapter # 1 of EIA Report. District and State, Justification for Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal selecting the site, whether other -713347. Page No-3 to 4. sites were considered. Current proposal is for expansion project. Hence no alternative site has been considered. II. A toposheet of the study area of Toposheet of the study area is included in Kindly Refer to Figure No-2.6 in radius of 10km and site location EIA report. Chapter # 2 of EIA report. on 1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet. (including all eco- Page No - 13 sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive places) III. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four Details are given in EIA Report Kindly Refer to Table No-1.3 and corners of the site Figure No-1.1 in Chapter # 1 of EIA report.

Page No-3 to 4.

IV. Google map-Earth downloaded of Google imaginary of project site Kindly Refer to Figure No-2.5 in the project site. downloaded from Google earth is given Chapter # 2 of EIA report. in EIA report. Page No - 13 V. Layout maps indicating existing Layout map of proposed project site is Kindly Refer to Figure No-2.7 in unit as well as proposed unit given in EIA report. Chapter # 2 of EIA report. indicating storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. Page No - 16 If located within an Industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of Industrial Area indicating location of unit within the Industrial area/Estate. VI. Photographs of the proposed and Photographs of the proposed site are Kindly Refer to Figure No-2.2, 2.3 and existing (if applicable) plant site. given in EIA report. 2.4 in Chapter # 2 of EIA report. If existing, show photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in Page No – 10 to 12 particular VII. Land use break-up of total land of Land use details are given in EIA report. Kindly Refer to Item No-2.4.3 in the project site (identified and Chapter # 2 of EIA report. acquired), government/private - agricultural, forest, wasteland, Page No - 18 water bodies, settlements, etc. shall be included. (not required for industrial area). VIII. A list of major industries with List of major industries with name and Kindly Refer to Item No-2.3.2 in

name and type within study area type within study area (10km radius) are Chapter # 2 of EIA report.

(10 km radius) shall be given in EIA report. Page No – 15 incorporated. Land use details of the study area. IX. Geological features and Geo- Details are given in EIA Report Kindly Refer to Item No-3.9 in hydrological status of the study Chapter # 3 of EIA report. area shall be included. Page No – 58 to 59. X. Details of Drainage of the project There are no major river within 1.0 Kms. upto 5 km radius of study area. If radius of the project. Damodar River is the site is within 1 km radius of nearest river flowing at distance of 4.0 any major river, peak and lean Kms. from the plant site. season river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based Kindly Refer to Figure No-3.18 in on peak rainfall data of the past Drainage Map is given in FEAI Report. Chapter # 3 of EIA report. 30 years. Details of Flood Level of the project site and maximum Page No – 61 Flood Level of the river shall also be provided. (mega green field projects) XI. Status of acquisition of land. If Land is already in possession of project Land documents are attached as acquisition is not complete, stage proponent. Annexure-IX. of the acquisition process and expected time of complete possession of the land.

XII. R&R details in respect of land in Not applicable as proposed expansion line with state Government will be taken up in the existing plant policy. premises only. Project site falls under the industrial area. 5. Forest and wildlife related issues (if applicable): I. Permission and approval for the Not applicable, as there is no forest land use of forest land (forestry involved in the plant site. clearance), if any, and recommendations of the State Forest Department. (if applicable). II. Land use map based on High Details are given EIA Report Kindly Refer to Figure No-3.13 in resolution satellite imagery (GPS) Chapter # 3 of EIA report. of the proposed site delineating the forestland (in case of projects Page No-56. involving forest land more than 40 ha). III. Status of Application submitted Not applicable, as there is no forest land -- for obtaining the stage I forestry involved in the plant site. clearance along with latest status shall be submitted. IV. The projects to be located within There is no National Park, Sanctuaries, -- 10 km of the National Parks, Bio-sphere Reserves and Migratory Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Corridors of Wild Life Animals within 10 Migratory Corridors of Wild km. from the project site.

Animals, the project proponent - shall submit the map duly authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features vis-à-vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of the Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon. V. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly Not applicable, as there is no Schedule I -- authenticated by the Chief fauna found in study area. Wildlife Warden of the State Government for conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any exists in the study area. VI. Copy of application submitted for Not Applicable -- clearance under the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing Committee of the National Board for Wildlife 6. Environmental Status I. Determination of atmospheric Details are incorporated EIA report. Kindly Refer to Item No-3.3 in inversion level at the project site Chapter # 3 of EIA report. and site-specific micrometeorological data using Page No – 34 to 35. temperature, relative humidity, hourly wind speed and direction

and rainfall. II. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 The monitoring stations are selected Kindly Refer to Table No-3.3 in locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, based on the pre-dominant wind Chapter # 3 of EIA report NOX, CO and other parameters direction, population zone and sensitive relevant to the project shall be receptors including reserved forests. Page No-36 collected. The monitoring stations shall be based CPCB guidelines and take into account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and sensitive receptors including reserved forests.

III. Raw data of all AAQ Raw data of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NO2 for 12 Kindly Refer to Table No-3.4 in measurement for 12 weeks of all weeks of all stations measured twice a Chapter # 3 of EIA report. stations as per frequency given in week are attached with EIA report. the NAQQM Notification of Nov. Min., max., average and 98% values for Page No-41 to 42 2009 along with – min., max., each of the AAQ parameters from data of average and 98% values for each all AAQ stations are also given. of the AAQ parameters from data of all AAQ stations should be provided as an annexure to the EIA Report. IV. Surface water quality of nearby There are only 8 surface water points Kindly Refer to Table No-3.8 in River (60m upstream and having water in study area. Details are Chapter # 3 of EIA report. downstream) and other surface given in EIA report drains at eight locations as per Page No-47 to 48

CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines. Kindly Refer to Table No-3.10 in Chapter # 3 of EIA report.

Page No-51. V. Whether the site falls near to Project site falls in the industrial area. polluted stretch of river identified by the CPCB/MoEF&CC. VI. Ground water monitoring at 8 ground water samples are collected Kindly Refer to Table No-3.8 in minimum at 8 locations shall be from the study area to assess the water Chapter # 3 of EIA report. included. quality during the study period. Page No-47 to 48

Kindly Refer to Table No-3.9 in Chapter # 3 of EIA report.

Page No-50 VII. Noise levels monitoring at 8 Noise levels were measured using Kindly Refer to Table No-3.6 in locations within the study area. integrated sound level meter in 8 Chapter # 3 of EIA report. locations. Page No-45

Kindly Refer to Table No-3.7 in Chapter # 3 of EIA report.

Page No-45 VIII. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB Complied. Kindly Refer to Table No-3.11 in guidelines. Chapter # 3 of EIA report.

Page No-53

Kindly Refer to Table No-3.12 in Chapter # 3 of EIA report.

Page No-54. IX. Traffic study of the area, type of Done Kindly Refer to Item No-4.5.3 in vehicles, frequency of vehicles for Chapter # 4 of EIA report. transportation of materials, additional traffic due to proposed PageNo-93 to 95 project, parking arrangement etc. X. Detailed description of flora and Details are given in EIA Report. Kindly Refer to Item No-3.14 in fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) Chapter # 3 of EIA report. existing in the study area shall be given with special reference to PageNo-70 to 78 rare, endemic and endangered species. If Schedule-I fauna are found within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan shall be prepared and furnished. XI. Socio-economic status of the Socio economic details are incorporated Kindly Refer to Item No-3.13 in study area. in EIA report. Chapter # 3 of EIA report.

Page No – 62 to 66. 7. Impact Assessment and Environment Management

Plan I. Assessment of ground level Air Quality Dispersion Modeling was Kindly Refer to Item No-4.5 in concentration of pollutants from carried out by following the CPCB Chapter # 4 of EIA report. the stack emission based on site- guidelines. specific meteorological features. Page No – 89 to 93. In case the project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modeling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain characteristics for determining the potential impacts of the project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be well assessed. Details of the model used and the input data used for modeling shall also be provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if any. II. Water Quality modelling – in There will be no effluent discharge from -- case, if the effluent is proposed to the DRI plant, Induction Furnace as be discharged in to the local closed circuit cooling system will be drain, then Water Quality adopted. Effluent from power plant will

Modelling study should be be treated and after ensuring compliance conducted for the drain water with SPCB norms, it will be utilized for taking into consideration the dust suppression, ash conditioning and upstream and downstream for greenbelt development. Effluent from quality of water of the drain. Rolling Mill will be sent to settling tank & will be recycled through closed circuit cooling system. Mill scales will be reused in SMS. Sanitary waste water will be treated in STP. Hence not applicable. III. Impact of the transport of the raw Details are given in EIA report. Kindly Refer to Item No-4.5.3 in materials and end products on Chapter # 4 of EIA report. the surrounding environment shall be assessed and provided. In Page No-93 to 95. this regard, options for transport of raw materials and finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail cum road transport or conveyor-cum- rail transport shall be examined. IV. A note on treatment of There will be no industrial wastewater Kindly Refer to Item No-2.9.2 in wastewater from different plant discharge as the plant will be designed Chapter # 2 of EIA report. operations, extent recycled and on zero effluent discharge principle. reused for different purposes Page No-29 to 30. shall be included. Complete scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of untreated and

treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of discharge under E (P) Rules. V. Details of stack emission and Details are given in EIA report. Kindly Refer to Item No-4.5 in action plan for control of Chapter # 4 of EIA report. emissions to meet standards. Page No – 89 to 93 VI. Measures for fugitive emission Kindly Refer to Item No-2.9.1 in Details are given in EIA report. control Chapter # 2 of EIA report.

Page No-29 VII. Details of hazardous waste No hazardous wastes will be generated Kindly Refer to Item No-2.9.3 in generation and their storage, from the project. Spent oil and grease Chapter # 2 of EIA report. utilization and disposal. Copies of will be collected and given to authorised MOU regarding utilization of solid re-processors. Page No-30 to 31 and hazardous waste shall also be included. EMP shall include the concept of waste-minimization, recycle/ reuse/ recover techniques, Energy conservation, and natural resource conservation. VIII. Proper utilization of fly ash shall Agreed be ensured as per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of action shall be provided.

IX. Action plan for the green belt A total greenbelt of 2.74 Ha (33.0 % of Kindly Refer to Item No-10.6.1 in development plan in 33 % area Total Plot Area) will be developed in the Chapter # 10 of EIA Report. i.e. land with not less than 1,500 plant premises. trees per ha. Giving details of Page No-153 to 154 species, width of plantation, We will plant tress @2500 trees/Ha planning schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around the project boundary and a scheme for greening of the roads used for the project shall also be incorporated. X. Action plan for rainwater Rain Water Harvesting Pits would be Kindly Refer to Item No-10.7 in harvesting measures at plant site provided at Project site for the Measured Chapter # 10 of EIA Report. shall be submitted to harvest Storm Water Load during Operation rainwater from the roof tops and Phase. Page No-154 to 155 storm water drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the water requirement from other sources. XI. Total capital cost and recurring Details are given in EIA report Kindly Refer to Item No-10.6 in cost/annum for environmental Chapter # 10 of EIA Report. pollution control measures shall be included Page No-156 XII. Action plan for post-project Details are given in EIA report Kindly Refer to Item No-6.1 in

environmental monitoring shall Chapter # 6 of EIA Report. be submitted. Page No-105 to 106 XIII. Onsite and Offsite Disaster Kindly Refer to Item No-7.4 in (natural and Man-made) Chapter # 7 of EIA Report. Preparedness and Emergency Management Plan including Risk Page No-130 to 136 Assessment and damage control. Disaster management plan should be linked with District Disaster Management Plan. 8. Occupational health I. Details of existing Occupational & To control any occupational health and Kindly Refer to Item No-7.4 in Safety Hazards. What are the safety impact a detailed planning for Chapter # 7 of EIA Report. exposure levels of above mitigation measures has been done in mentioned hazards and whether the design stage of the project. Apart Page No-130 to 136 they are within Permissible from the occupational exposure Exposure level (PEL). If these are mitigation plans for various activities and not within PEL, what measures work areas of hazards, following existing the company has adopted to keep administrative control measures will be them within PEL so that health of undertaken to ensure occupational the workers can be preserved, health and safety of the employees:  All employees will be trained for EHS policies and practices.  Periodic health check-up for

employees.  All employees will be trained in first aid and emergency handling during fire breakout.  Preparation and training of the employees in safety and emergency preparedness.  Work permit system.  Compliance to PPE use.  Safety display sign board throughout the plant II. Details of exposure specific Workers' health shall be evaluated by pre Kindly Refer to Item No-7.4 in health status evaluation of designed format, for chest x rays, Chapter # 7 of EIA Report. worker. If the workers’ health is Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing being evaluated by pre designed (Far & Near vision. color vision and any Page No-130 to 136 format, chest x rays, Audiometry, other ocular defect) ECG, during Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & preplacement and periodical Near vision, colour vision and any examinations that will give the details of other ocular defect) ECG, during the same. pre placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. Details regarding last month analyzed data of above mentioned parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure and

department wise. III. Annual report of heath status of Agreed workers with special reference to Occupational Health and Safety IV. Plan and fund allocation to Agreed Kindly Refer to Item No-10.6 in ensure the occupational health & Chapter # 10 of EIA Report. safety of all contract and casual workers Page No-156 9. Corporate Environment Policy i. Does the company have a well The company has well laid down Kindly refer Item No - 10.1 in laid down Environment Policy Environment Policy, approved by Chapter # 10 of EIA report. approved by its Board of Management. Directors? If so, it may be detailed Page No. 144 to 145 in the EIA report. ii. Does the Environment Policy The organization has procedure detailing Kindly refer Item No - 10.2.4 in prescribe for standard operating compliance with all aspects of Chapter # 10 of EIA report. process / procedures to bring Environmental norms including the into focus any infringement / process of corrective actions for its Page No. 147 deviation / violation of the improvement. environmental or forest norms / The policy provides a framework for conditions? If so, it may be setting and reviewing environmental detailed in the EIA. objectives, which includes a commitment to fulfil its compliance obligations, to the protection of the environment, including prevention of pollution and other specific commitment (s) relevant to the context

of the organization. iii. What is the hierarchical system Hierarchical system of the company is Kindly refer Item No - 10.2 in or Administrative order of the mentioned in EIA report. Chapter # 10 of EIA report. company to deal with the environmental issues and for Page No – 145 ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be given iv. Does the company have system of Kindly refer Item No - 10.2.4 in reporting of non-compliances / Chapter # 10 of EIA report. violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors Page No. 147 of the company and / or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report 10. Details regarding infrastructure Local people will be employed during Kindly Refer to Item No-10.3 in Chapter facilities such as sanitation, fuel, construction phase. # 10 of EIA Report. restroom etc. to be provided to the labour force during Page No – 148 construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase. 11. Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER)

i. To address the Public Hearing As per MoEF&CC Office Memorandum Kindly Refer to Item No-10.9 in Chapter issues, an amount as specified vide F.No.22-65/2017-IA.III dated. 30th # 10 of EIA Report. under Ministry's Office September 2020, following is budgetary Memorandum vide F.No. 22- allocation (Rs.53.5 Lakhs) for Page No – 157 to 158 65/20 17-IA.1I1 dated 1st May commitment made by Project Proponent 2018 amounting to Rs...... to address the concern raised during crores, shall be earmarked by the public hearing project proponent, towards Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER). Distinct CER projects shall be carved out based on the local public hearing issues. Project estimate shall be prepared based on PWD schedule of rates for each distinct Item and schedule for time bound action plan shall be prepared. These CER projects as indicated by the project proponent shall be implemented along with the main project. Implementation of such program shall be ensured by constituting a Committee comprising of the project proponent, representatives of village

Panchayat & District Administration. Action taken report in this regard shall be submitted to the Ministry's Regional Office. No free distribution/donations and or free camps shall be included in the above CER budget. 12. Any litigation pending against the No litigation is pending against the -- project and/or any project and / or any direction / direction/order passed by any order passed by any Court of Law against Court of Law against the project, the project. if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance/ATR to the notice(s) and present status of the case 13. ‘A tabular chart with index for Noted -- point wise compliance of above TORs. 14. The TORs prescribed shall be Noted -- valid for a period of three years

for submission of the EIA/EMP reports along with Public Hearing Proceedings (wherever stipulated). The following general points shall be noted: i. All documents shall be properly Noted indexed, page numbered. ii. Period/date of data collection Noted shall be clearly indicated. iii. Authenticated English translation Noted of all material in Regional languages shall be provided iv. The letter/application for Noted environmental clearance shall quote the MOEF file No. and also attach a copy of the letter. v. The copy of the letter received Noted from the Ministry shall be also attached as an annexure to the final EIA-EMP Report. vi. The index of the final EIA-EMP Noted report must indicate the specific chapter and page no. of the EIA- EMP Report vii. While preparing the EIA report, Noted

the instructions for the proponents and instructions for the consultants issued by MOEF vide O.M. No. J-11013/41/2006- IA.II (I) dated 4th August, 2009, which are available on the website of this Ministry shall also be followed. viii. The consultants involved in the Noted preparation of EIA-EMP report after accreditation with Quality Council of India (QCl) /National Accreditation Board of Education and Training (NABET) would need to include a certificate in this regard in the EIA-EMP reports prepared by them and data provided by other organization/ Laboratories including their status of approvals etc. Name of the Consultant and the Accreditation details shall be posted on the EIA- EMP Report as well as on the cover of the Hard Copy of the Presentation material for EC

presentation. ix. TORs’ prescribed by the Expert Complied Appraisal Committee (Industry) shall be considered for preparation of EIA-EMP report for the project in addition to all the relevant information as per the ‘Generic Structure of EIA’ given in Appendix III and IIIA in the EIA 66 Notification, 2006. Where the documents provided are in a language other than English, an English translation shall be provided. The final EIA- EMP report shall be submitted to the State Pollution Control Board of the concerned State for conduct of Public Hearing. The SPCB shall conduct the Public Hearing/public consultation, district-wise, as per the provisions of EIA notification, 2006. The Public Hearing shall be chaired by an Officer not below the rank of Additional District Magistrate. The issues raised in

the Public Hearing and during the consultation process and the commitments made by the project proponent on the same shall be included separately in EIA-EMP Report in a separate chapter and summarized in a tabular chart with financial budget (capital and revenue) along with time-schedule of implementation for complying with the commitments made. The final EIA report shall be submitted to the Ministry for obtaining environmental clearance. B SPECIFIC TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR EIA STUDIES FOR METALLURGICAL INDUSTRIES (FERROUS & NON FERROUS) 1 Complete process flow diagram Kindly Refer to Item No-2.7 in Chapter # describing each unit, its processes 2 of EIA Report. and operations, along with material and energy inputs & outputs Page No – 21 to 27 (material and energy balance). 2 Details on blast furnace/ open Kindly Refer to Item No-2.7 in Chapter # hearth furnace/ basic oxygen 2 of EIA Report. furnace/ladle refining, casting and rolling plants etc. Page No – 21 to 27

3 Details on installation/activation of -- --- opacity meters with recording with proper calibration system 4 Details on toxic metals including There will not be any fluoride emission from -- mercury, arsenic and fluoride the proposed expansion project emissions 5 Details on stack height requirement All details are given in EIA Report Kindly Refer Table No-4.17 in Chapter # 4 for integrated steel of EIA Report.

Page No-90 to 91 6 Details on ash disposal and All details are given in EIA Report Kindly Refer Table No-2.23 in Chapter # 2 management -Non-ferrous metal of EIA Report.

Page No-30 to 31 7 Complete process flow diagram Not applicable, as there will not be any -- describing production of facility of process of lead/zinc/copper/ aluminium, etc. lead/zinc/copper/aluminum etc. in the existing as well as in expansion project 8 Raw materials substitution or NA -- elimination 9 Details on smelting, thermal Not applicable, as proposed project is not -- refining, melting, slag fuming, and Aluminum processing unit is Mini Steel Waelz kiln operation Plant. 10 Details on Holding and de-gassing of Not applicable, as proposed project is not -- molten metal from primary and Aluminum processing unit is Mini Steel secondary aluminum, materials Plant. pre-treatment, and from melting and smelting of secondary aluminium

11 Details on solvent recycling Not applicable, as proposed project is not -- Aluminum processing unit is Mini Steel Plant. 12 Details on precious metals recovery Not applicable, as proposed project is not -- Aluminum processing unit is Mini Steel Plant. 13 Details on composition, generation WHRB boiler will be installed to generated -- and utilization of waste/fuel gases power heat generation from DRI plant. from coke oven plant and their utilization. 14 Details on toxic metal content in the Details are given in EIA report Kindly Refer Table No-10.4 in Chapter # waste material and its composition 10 of EIA Report. and end use (particularly of slag). Page No-152 15 Trace metals Mercury, arsenic and No emission of Mercury, arsenic and fluoride emissions in the raw fluoride emissions in the raw material. material. 16. Trace metals in waste material Given in EIA Report Kindly Refer Table No-10.4 in Chapter # especially slag. 10 of EIA Report.

Page No-152 17 Plan for trace metal recovery 18 Trace metals in water NA Kindly Refer Table No-3.9 and 3.10 in Chapter # 3 of EIA Report. Page No-50 to 51 C ADDITIONAL TOR FOR INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT NOT APPLICABLE.

M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Private Limited EXECUTIVE SUMMARY i. Project name and location (Village, Distt, State, Industrial Estate) Name: Expansion of Sponge iron production from 60,000 TPA to 1,20,000 TPA, new Captive Power Plant (15 MW), Induction Furnaces (Billets -1,35,000 TPA) and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA) Location: Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal -713347. ii. Products and capacities. If expansion proposal, then existing products with capacities and reference to earlier EC.

Sponge Iron Production Total Existing Expansion Capacity No of Rotary Kiln 02 No’s 01 No’s Capacity of Rotary Kiln 100 TPD 200 TPD Production capacity per day 200 Ton 200 Ton 1,20,000 TPA No. of days operation per day 300 300 Installed Capacity Per Annum 60,000 TPA 60,000 TPA Billets Production No of Induction Furnace 3 No. Melting Capacity of Induction 15 Ton Each Furnace No of Heat per Day Nil 10 1,35,000 TPA Production capacity per day 450 Ton No. of days operation per day 300 Installed Capacity Per Annum 1,35,000 TPA Rolling Mill (TMT Bars and Structural) No of Re-heating Furnace 01 No Melting Capacity of Furnace 10 Ton Production capacity per day Nil 200 Ton 60,000 TPA No. of days operation per day 300 Days Installed Capacity Per Annum 60,000 TPA Captive Power Plant Power Plant

2 x 10 TPH-4MW 8 MW  WHRB Boiler (03 No’s) Nil 1 x 22 TPH-4MW

7 MW  AFBC Boiler (01 No’s) 1 x 30 TPH-7MW CTO Obtained from WBPCB vide Letter No-0118221, dated:-22.04.2019, which is valid upto 30.04.2024. iii. Requirement of land, raw material, water, power, fuel, with source of supply (Quantitative)  Land – 8.30 Ha  Raw Materials Iron ore lumps (1, 80,000 TPA) and dolomite (3,600 TPA) will be purchased from private mines located in Odisha. Coal (1,32,000 TPA) will be purchased by e-auction from nearby Raniganj coal fields. Depending upon the cost efficacy, coal may be imported from South Africa. Scrap and pig iron is available locally.

Iron ore and coal will be transported by rail till Andal siding. From Andal siding, located 5 km away from the project site. From Andal siding it will be carried by trucks. Othe materials like dolomite, scrap and pig iron will be transported by road. Finished product (TMT Bar and Wire Rods will be transported by road. Total road movement will involve 18 trucks (25 Tons capacity). The project site is connected to NH2 (Kolkata-Delhi Grand Trunk road) by a 300 m long, 2 lane industrial road.

 Total Water Requirement: 674 KL/day. Source: Asansol Durgapur Development Authority (ADDA).  Total Power: 21.1 MW. Source: CPP & SEB DG Sets = 2 x 500 KVA  Fuel: Coal Bed Methane iv. Process description in brief, specifically indicating the gaseous emission, liquid effluent and solid and hazardous wastes. Materials balance shall be presented. Sponge Iron Refractory lined rotary kilns (1 x 200 TPD) will be added for reduction of iron ore to iron. Coal will be used as reductant and source of heat. Dolomite will be used as flux. A central Burner located at the discharge end will be used for initial heating of the kiln. The cooler discharge material consists of sponge iron lumps, sponge iron fines and char. Magnetic and non-magnetic material will be separated through magnetic separators and stored in separate bins. The hot flue gases will be taken to a Waste Heat Recovery Boilers and after heat recovery they will be treated in high efficiency ESP and discharged into the atmosphere through 70 m tall stack Steel Melting Shop In Steel Melting Shop (SMS), Sponge Iron will be melted along with scrap and pig iron to make liquid steel. Liquid steel will be cast into billets using CCM. The SMS will consist of Induction furnace, Ladles, & Continuous Casting Machine (CCM). There will be three Induction Furnaces, 15 Ton capacity each. Rolling Mill Hot billets will be directly charged into Rolling Mill. Approximately 20% of the billets would be charged into a Methane fired reheating furnace for the heating of billets. A bar and round mill will be installed in the plant to produce TMT Bars/ Structural steel. Power Generation WHRB (Waste Heat Recovery Boiler) 2 x 10 TPH Boilers will be installed for 2 x 100 TPD existing DRI Kiln. 1 x 22 TPH Boiler will be installed for the 200 TPD DRI Kilns. 8 MW electricity will be generated. AFBC (Atmospheric Fluidized Bed Combustion) 1x30 TPH AFBC boiler will be installed to generate 7 MW electricity. Mixed fuel, comprising of mix of dolochar and imported coal will be used in the AFBC boiler. Fly ash and bed ash will be collected in dry form in silos and utilized as per MOEF&CC rule for cement making and brick making. MOU has been done with cement plan and brick plants. High efficiency ESP will be provided to bring down the particulate matter to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and discharged through 70 m tall stack. In order to control SO2 o 100 mg/Nm3, FGD will be installed. NOx will be controlled using Extra Low NOx burners to 100 mg/Nm3. Mercury will be controlled to 0.03 mg/Nm3 by wet scrubbing (FGD) and by choice of coal having low mercury content. Material Balance for Sponge Iron (1,20,000 TPA) SL.No INPUT Quantity, TPA OUTPUT Quantity, TPA 1 Iron Ore Lumps 1,80,000 Sponge Iron 1,20,000 2 Coal 132,000 Dolochar 36,000 Dust from ESP/Bag 3 Dolomite 3,600 15,000 filter LOI / Reaction Gases 1,44,000

Accretion 600

Total 3,15,600 Total 3,15,600

Material Balance for Billets (1,35,000 TPA) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity 1 Sponge Iron 1,20,000 Billets 1,35,000 2 Pig Iron 18,000 Slag 24000 3 Scrap 30,000 LOI and Dust 9500 Total 1,68,500 Total 1,68,500

Material Balance for Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity 1 Billets 64,920 TMT Bars/ Structural steel 60,000 2 Mill scales 1,000 3 End Cuttings 2,320 Total 64,920 Total 64,920

Material Balance for Power Plant (AFBC Boiler – 30 Ton) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity 1 Coal Imported 10,500 Power 7 MW 2 Dolochar (In-house) 36,000 Ash 22,600 TPA Gases 23,900 TPA Total 46,500 Total 46,500

Air Emissions SL.No Source Control PM Emission Other Equipment Emission 1 DRI Kilns ESP <30 mg/Nm3 2 Raw Material Handling Bag Filters, PTFE <30 mg/Nm3 3 Cooler discharge Bag Filter, PTFE <30 mg/Nm3 4 Product Separation Bag Filter, PTFE <30 mg/Nm3 5 Induction Furnaces with FES & bag filters, <30 mg/Nm3 CCM <30 mg/Nm3 5 Rolling Mill, Gas Fired Stack height <30 mg/Nm3 6 AFBC Boiler ESP <30 mg/Nm3 SO2- <30 mg/Nm3 NOx- <30 mg/Nm3 Hg- <0.3 mg/Nm3 7 Coal Mill Bag Filter, PTFE <30 mg/Nm3 8 Internal Roads and shop Asphalted. -- floors Industrial vacuum cleaners 9 Conveyors Covered -- bag filters at transfer points 10 Raw Material Storage Coal- Covered -- Area shed Other raw materials: stock piles covered with tarpaulin

Liquid Effluent

 DRI Plant, SMS and Rolling Mill do not require any water for the manufacturing process.  Water is required only for cooling purpose. Closed circuit cooling towers will be installed.  Blow down of cooling towers will be taken to tank and reused for dust suppression in raw material unloading yard  Cooling water from rolling mill will be recycled via descaling tanks.  Effluent generated from power plant (boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration, cooling tower blow down and plant washings) will be treated in ETP and utilized for dust suppression and ash moistening.  Domestic wastewater from toilets, washroom and canteen will be treated in STP and treated water will be used for greenbelt development.  Storm water drains will be made along the plant boundary. Sedimentation pits will be provided along the storm water drains. The runoff will be discharged to municipal sewer.  Garland drains will be provided along the raw material stock yard. The water will be collected in sedimentation tank, treated and then reused for dust suppression.

Solid Wastes Management S.No Name Quantity, Utilization 1 DRI Char 36,000 100% In power generation Ash/Dust from In civil construction purpose and Will be given 2 15,000 DRI to Brick manufacturers. Kiln Accretion 3 600 Will be utilized in road construction Slag Slag from SMS will be crushed and iron will be recovered & remaining non-magnetic material will be inert nature and will be used as sub base 4 SMS slag 24,000 material in road construction/ used for brick manufacturing/ civil construction works like PCC and wall construction. Mill scales Will be given to Ferro alloy 5 15,00 from Rolling Mill manufacturing units and used in IF. 6 End Cutting 3,420 Will be recycled to SMS unit Will be given to cement plants/Brick 7 Ash from CPP 22,600 manufacturers. MOU has been executed. Hazardous waste generation, storage & disposal Waste oil: 1.0 KL / Annum This will be stored in covered drums in a designated area and will be given to WBPCB approved reprocessors. v. Measures for mitigating the impact on the environment and mode of discharge or disposal. Point source emission control systems described above: Action Plan for Control and Monitoring Of Fugitive Emissions The fugitive dust (PM) emissions occur from road, raw material unloading and loading, vehicle movement leading the resuspension of settled dust, etc. Following mitigation measures are recommended for its control:

i. Apply water to suppress dust generation namely use of Anti-smog guns, Water canons, Water sprinklers and Hydrant and hoses connected to water reservoir/tank ii. Use of dust suppressants namely liquid polymer emulsion, agglomeration chemicals (lignosulphonates, polyacrylamides), cementitious products like lime and calcium sulphate, Petroleum based emulsions, Chloride salts (Mg and Ca) iii. Use of scaffolding sheets /nets, wind fencing for dust control iv. Stabilised concreted earthworks with stone, soil, geotextiles, vegetation, compacting. v. Use enclosures – covering for stockpiles – tarpaulin, plastic, fences, screens vi. Keep proper shape of stockpiles (avoid steep slopes and faces) vii. Remove muck from truck tyres an under bodies prior to leaving the plant premises viii. Minimize the drop height of raw materials ix. All road surfaces for permanent movement of trucks shall be paved (Concreted) x. Apply water spray in conjunction with cutting, grinding, drilling xi. Provide enclosure around mixing process xii. Use mechanical road sweeping machine for regular cleaning of roads xiii. Use industrial vacuum cleaner for cleaning all shop floors and roofs. Liquid effluents: Zero liquid discharge shall be maintained. Wastewater shall be treated and reused within the plant premises. Storm water drains will be made along the plant boundary. Sedimentation pits will be provided along the storm water drains. The runoff will be discharged to municipal sewer. Garland drains will be provided along the raw material stock yard. The water will be collected in sedimentation tank, treated and then reused for dust suppression. Solid wastes: Solid wastes generated from the project are not hazardous. They will be utilized for various beneficial purposes. vi. Capital cost of the project, estimated time of completion. The estimated project cost is Rs. 171 Crores.. Time of completion: 12 months vii. Site selected for the project Nature of land: Agricultural (single/double crop), barren, Govt/private land, status of is acquisition, nearby (in 2-3 km.) water body, population, with in 10 km other industries, forest, eco-sensitive zones, accessibility, (note in case of industrial estate this information may not be necessary) Nature of Land: 100% Industrial land in procession of company Industry List within 10 km S.No Industries Name Distance Direction 1 Jai Balaji Industries 0.3 SE 2 Shyam SEL Ltd. 0.1 ENE 3 Shyam Super Cement 0.05 NNE 4 Durgapur Steel Thermal Power Station 6.5 ESE 5 Sabitri Sponge Iron Plant 2 NW 6 Ambuja Cement Ltd. 1.8 NW viii. Baseline environmental data air quality, surface and ground water quality, soil characteristic, flora and fauna, socio-economic condition of the nearby population. Air Quality Baseline data was generated during post-monsoon season from 17th December 2019 to 16th March, 2020 by Envirochek, Kolkata. One-month additional study was generated by GRC during 1st to 31st October 2020 to validate the previous Met data and Air quality data generated by Envirochek. For other parameters fresh data has been generated (once during the post-monsoon period)- 8 noise quality, 8 ground water quality, 8 surface water quality, 4 soil quality, ecology and socio economic data was generated by GRC during the post monsoon season (1st to 31st October 2020). 10 km area around the site was considered as study area. Data was generated by following the standard procedures of the Ministry of Environment Forests and Climate Change and the Central Pollution Control Board. Summary of the baseline data is given below:  The predominant wind direction is from NE.

 PM2.5 was observed in the range of 38.8 – 49.0 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of

PM2.5 was found at Mangalpur industrial estate.

 PM10 was observed in the range of 64.7 – 86 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of

PM10 was found at Mangalpur industrial estate.

 SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 6.5 to 12.9 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit.

 NOx concentration in was observed in the range of 15.4 – 30.0 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit.  CO concentration in was observed in the range of 250 – 850 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit. Ground Water Quality  pH was observed in the range of 6.48 – 7.25 which is well within the norms.  Total dissolved solid - 640 to 709 mg/  Total hardness - 240-300 mg/L  Total Alkalinity - 178-220 mg/L  Total Iron - 0.29-0.0.71 mg/L  Coliform Count - Nil. Surface Water  pH : 7.19-7.89.  TDS: 278-405 mg/L.  DO: 3.1 – 6.6 mg/L.  COD: 27-55 mg/L.  BOD: 3.0-7.0 mg/L. Noise Quality The noise level study shows that the noise levels are meeting the acceptable norms. The noise levels in the industrial area varies from 68.9 to 73 dBA. At plant boundary it varies from 69.6 to 58.4 dBA. The noise levels in the residential area varies from 44.2 to 53.4 dBA. At SKS school the day time noise level max is 49.3 dBA, which is within the standard of 50 dBA. ix. Identification of hazards in handling, processing and storage of hazardous material and safety system provided to mitigate the risk. No hazardous material will be processed or stored in the plant. LDO will be stored near the power plant in 5 KL Tank. All safety measures as prescribed by OISD / PESO will be followed. Fire extinguishers will be provided at all strategic locations(Coal yard, coal bunkers, oil tank, cable gallery, transformer, etc) x. Likely impact of the project on air, water, land, flora-fauna and nearby population Impact on Ambient Air Quality (in ug/m3, 24-h average) Parameter Background Predicted MGLC Superimposed NAAQS level, Maximum Ground Concentration 24-h avg Maximum Level Concentration (Nov 2009)

SO2 12.9 4.7 17.6 80

NOX 30.0 3.2 33.2 80

PM10 86 3.6 89.6 100

PM2.5 49 1.2 50.2 60

Tha maximum GLC will occur at a distance of 500-750 m distance in the downwind SW direction. No human habitation is present at this location. After 750 m, the impact will be moderate till 2000 m. After 2000 m the impact will be low. Only one small habitation is present between 750 - 2000 m in SW direction. Water:

ZLD shall be maintained. Water Balance shown below:

Land: No additional land shall be acquired. 100% land is industrial land.

Flora Fauna - No national park or wildlife sanctuary or biosphere reserve is present in the study area. No endangered species of flora and fauna is found in the study area. Nearby population: No population is present within 750 m area of the project site.

xi. Emergency preparedness plan in case of natural or in plant emergencies The project involves only on-site risk (fire in coal yard, accidental spillage of molten metal and slag, fire in LDO tank, mechanical injury to body parts and burn injury). On- site risk management plan provided. No natural hazards like earthquake, flood, cloud burst, landslides, etc are observed in the area xii. Issues raised during public hearing (if applicable) and response given:

S. Name & Issues Raised Commitment by PP N 1 Sri. Sunil Asked about the water Water will be used only for cooling Bhagat of pollution control purpose and will be recycled in the Bhagat Para, measures to be taken process and there will not be any Raniganj. by the project discharge of the waste water outside the proponent during the project premises. Sanitary wastewater will operation and be treated STP. Overall plant will be based construction phase of on zero effluent discharge scheme. the Project Proponent also stated that they Proposed expansion always prefer to provide employment to project and local people. employment The job and they will be required to generation. submit the application to company and selection will be made on the basis of candidate eligibility and qualification. 2 Sri. Jico He welcomed the Project Proponent replied that Regarding Banerjee of project and stated financial aid during the festival Season Punjabi that the government Project Proponent stated that Company is More, is keen in industrial being in existence since last many years Raniganj. development of the and had already contributed in Durga state. He also Pooja and Kali Pooja in past and requested the project performed their part. He also assured to proponent to provide provide financial support in the best financial assistance possible way after the expansion of the during the Durga Puja, said expansion project during the festival Kali Puja and other season in future. cultural activities in the local area. S. Name & Issues Raised Commitment by PP N 3 Sri. Sanjeev He raised his concern Project Proponent stated that regarding Giri of of the unemployment Priority to local peoples for the job Rambagan, in the area due to opportunity Project Proponent replied Raniganj. Covid-19 pandemic that many of workers are from local and also requested villages only who are currently working in project proponent to the existing give preference to Project and also stated that for the future local people over the expansion we are liable to give priority to other in terms of the the Local residents for the job opportunity. job opportunity from Opportunities as per the company policy. the proposed expansion project. 4 Ms. Ranu He welcomed the PP stated that Regarding updation of Tappa of project. She raised his medical facility in the area and ambulance Egara Gram, concern about services. Project Proponent replied that at Raniganj. the medical facility in present there is Ambulance service and it the areas and also is already available in the project premises requested project which may be utilized by the local inmates proponent to provide as per their requirements and in future as the ambulance service a part of CSR activity they will try to to nearby village. upgrade the medical facilities in the nearby villages with the mutual consent of the local authorities. 5 Ms. Anima He requested that the Project Proponent stated that Regarding Das of Sisu Project Proponent for the unemployment due to Covid-19 Bagan, the financial help pandemic and financial aid to children for Raniganj in terms of the the Education. Project Proponent assured medical, jobs, that necessary facilities will be provided to education facility for the Children. As part of CER activity, they their Children and will distribute books, school bags and migrate people/labor other necessary items to the nearby from other states in schools and as already assured that the nearby village priority will be given to the local people who all have lost their for the jobs in future. living hood due to pandemic crises around the country. 6 Sri. Sukumar He requested that the Project Proponent assured that Regarding Hembram of Project Proponent repair of existing road Project Proponent Baktarnagar, regarding stated that fulfilling this demand is not in S. Name & Issues Raised Commitment by PP N Bandanga. the repairing work to our scope. be done for existing Under the purview of the Project road in nearby Proponent. However, after discussing with villages as during the local authority they will. Repair/ rainy seasons people construct the required works under the faces many problems CER activities by the for their daily routine Company. work. 7 Sri. Dikesh He welcomed the Project Proponent stated that regarding Singh of expansion project. He the CER activity, as per the applicable College Para, asked about the norms CER budget shall be allocated as Raniganj. detailed CER plan by per the need of the surrounding villages project proponent for and focus area will be education & the development of capacity building, sustainable livelihood, "the vicinity area of agricultural & land development, women the project. empowerment & income generation, natural resource management & watershed development and other social services. 8 Sri. Koushik He welcomed the PP stated that regarding overall benefits of Mukherjee expansion project. He the projects to the nearby area : Project of Kumar also expressed his Proponent stated that Project will provide Bazar, gratitude towards the Direct Employment & Indirect Raniganj. Project Proponent for Employment to about 50-70 people on their contribution in daily wages basis during the construction various areas stage. There are 130 person employed in Relating to socio- the existing unit for the various job economic activities categories and in the proposed expansion and asked about the project, about 170 person are expected to project benefits to the be employed during operational phase, for local people. the skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled category. 9 Sri. Nirmal He raised his concern Project Proponent stated that plant is in Pal of about the air pollution operation since 2002 onwards, they are Baktarnagar to the vicinity area, keeping air pollution under control. The Gram, where many adhiwasi Project Proponent assured that in the Raniganj families are already proposed expansion project, best available living and measures to technology shall be adopted to control the be taken for control of dust emission and stack height will be as air pollution. He also per the CPCB/SPCB norms. Fume suggested that the Extraction System, ducts and Bag Filter, S. Name & Issues Raised Commitment by PP N green belt should be ESP will be installed. Vehicles used during de eloped at the operation phase comply with the maximum possible applicable pollution control norms and extent and the same should mandatorily have the PUC should be maintained. certificates and adequate trees would be planted inside the plant premises as per statutory guild lines. 10 Sri. Makar He welcomed the Project Proponent stated that already it is Mandal of expansion project. He discussed in details and they will follow all Mangalpur raised his concern regulatory compliance to keep air Gram, about the pollution pollution under control. Raniganj. and how the project proponent will control the air pollution and water pollution and also asked about the detail of equipment to be installed to control all type of pollution during the operation of the project xiii. CSR plan with proposed expenditure. (revised as per OM dated 30-9-2020) S.No Concerns Physical activity & Budget Target for \ raised action plan INR implementation of during (Lakh) action plan public 1st year 2nd year hearing 1 Improve Provide the Medical 15.5 Lakhs 10 Lakhs 5.5 Lakhs Health equipment to 20 Bed - 4 In In Raniganj Infrastructur Government Lakhs Ballabhpu Health Centre e in Area Hospital / Health r & 20 O Cylinder Centre at Raniganj, 2 Baktarnag – 3 Lakh Ballavpur and ar Baktarnagar (Beds, 10 - Oxygen Health Oxygen Cylinder, Concentrator – Centre Oxygen 5 Lakh Concentrator, AC, Air Purifer) 8 Air Purifier – 2 Lakh

Sanitizer and Mask – 1.5 lakh 2 Repair of 2000 m road will be 10 lakh The work roads in strengthened. This will be Baktar nagar will be done in complete and Chak consultation with d in first Brindabanp the village year ur panchayat 3 Providing Willing and 10.5 Lakhs Training Training of 13 employment employable youths of 12 persons will to local will be identified in Stipend – 3.0 persons be completed Lakh will be people consultation with in 2nd year (1000/- complete gram panchayat of stipend to 25 d in 1st village Mangalpur persons for 1 year (25 Nos). They will year) be trained in Raniganj ITI for ITI Fee – 7.5 trades namely Lakhs (30000/- electrician, fitters, yearly fee for welders, painters, 25 persons) and civil construction work, etc. Fees will be paid by PP. After successful completion of training, the youths will be offered employment in company 4 Infrastructur PP will make pucca 10 Lakhs PP will PP will e kitchen with fume 3 Kitchen – 2.5 complete complete developmen exhaust in 3 local Lakhs work in work in 400 Tables & t of local schools providing Mangalpu Baktar Nagar Chairs – 4.0 L nd Primary mid-day meals to 12 Computer – r and school in 2 Schools students, provide 3.0 Lakhs Chak year furniture, 3 Colour Brindaba computers and printer – 1.5 npur colour printers to Lakhs schools the 3 schools Mangalpur village Baktar nagar village Chak Brindabanpur village

5 Developmen Make recharge Rs. 7.5 Lakhs PP will PP will t of rain shaft type RWH complete complete the water structures in 3 the work work in harvesting villages in 2 Baktar nagar structures Mangalpur village villages in in 2nd year Baktar nagar village first year Chak Brindabanpur village xiv. Occupational Health Measures Personal protection equipment like helmet, safety shoes, goggles, gloves, apron, nose mask, ear plugs, will be provided to workers Health checkup of all workers during the time of employment and thereafter every 5 years will be done as per norms First aid facility shall be established inside plant xv. Post project Monitoring Plan S.No. Particulars Frequency of Duration of Parameters required to Monitoring sampling be monitored 1. Water & Waste water quality A. Ground Water Once in a month Grab As per IS: 10500 quality in the area. sampling B. Effluent at the inlet Once in a month composite As per EPA Rules, 1996 & outlet of the ETP. sampling (24 (pH, TDS, TSS, Temp, COD, hourly) O&G, Fe, Cr. Pb, Ni, As. C. Sanitary Twice in a month Composite As per EPA Rules, 1996 Wastewater (inlet sampling (pH, TSS, BOD, COD, Free & outlet of STP) Chlorine, ammonia, oil & grease, Coliform count) 2. Air Quality A. Stack Monitoring CEMS (real time, -- PM2.5, PM10, SO2 & NOx DRI Kiln/ESP/ online) WHRB SMS stack B. Ambient Air Quality CAAQMS (real 24 hours, PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and at plant boundary time, online data continuous NOx and CO (Admin building) transmitted to CPCB & SPCS servers) C Ambient Air Quality Twice a weekly 24 hours, PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and Outside the plant monitoring using continuous NOx and CO boundary High Volume (NE, SW and W samplers direction, 1km away from plant boundary)

C. Fugitive emissions Twice in a month 24 hours PM2.5 and PM10 (Process area and 20 m unwind of the source RMH Yard) and downwind of source (raw material unloading, slag crushing, etc) 4. Noise level monitoring Ambient Noise Once in a month 24 hours Noise levels dBA (Leq) levels at 4 sides of plant boundary

TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER-1 : INTRODUCTION ...... 1

1.1 PURPOSE OF REPORT ...... 1 1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT ...... 2 1.2.1 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT ...... 2 1.2.2 PROJECT PROPONENT ...... 2 1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE, LOCATION OF THE PROJECT AND ITS IMPORTANCE TO THE COMPANY REGION ...... 3 1.3.1 NATURE & SIZE OF PROJECT ...... 3 1.3.2 LOCATION OF PROJECT ...... 3 1.3.3 IMPORTANCE OF PROJECT TO THE COUNTRY & REGION ...... 4 1.4 SCOPE OF THE STUDY ...... 4 1.5 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT...... 5 1.6 LAWS APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT ...... 7 CHAPTER-2 : PROJECT DESCRIPTION ...... 8

2.1 TYPE OF THE PROJECT ...... 8 2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT ...... 8 2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT (MAPS SHOWING GENERAL LOCATION,SPECIFIC LOCATION, PROJECT BOUNDARY & PROJECT SITE LAYOUT)...... 8 2.3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING WITHIN 10 KM. RADIUS OF THE PLANT SITE...... 14 2.3.2 LIST OF INDUSTRIES WITHIN 10 KM. RADIUS OF THE PLANT SITE ...... 15 2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION (INCL. ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES REQUIRED BY OR FOR THE PROJECT) ...... 17 2.4.1 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION ...... 17 2.4.2 PROJECT COST ...... 17 2.4.3 DETAILS OF LAND ...... 18 TOTAL LAND IS UNDER THE POSSESSION OF PROJECT PROPONENT AND FALLS WITHIN INDUSTRIAL ESTATE...... 18 2.4.4 WATER REQUIREMENT ...... 18 2.4.5 POWER REQUIREMENT & BACKUP...... 19 2.4.6 RAW MATERIAL REQUIRED ALONG ESTIMATED QUANTITY, LIKELY SOURCE &MARKETING AREA OF FINAL PRODUCT/S MODE OF TRANSPORT OF RAW MATERIAL AND FINISHED PRODUCT...... 19 2.5 EMPLOYMENT GENERATION (DIRECT & INDIRECT) DUE TO THE PROJECT...... 20 2.6 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION ...... 21 2.7 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION ...... 21 2.8 PROJECT DESCRIPTION (SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATIONS OF THE FEASIBILITY DRAWINGS WHICH GIVE INFORMATION IMPORTANT FOR EIA PURPOSE)...... 28 2.9 DESCRIPTION OF MITIGATION MEASURES INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO MEET ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS, ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING CONDITIONS, OR OTHER EIA REQUIREMENTS...... 28 2.9.1 AIR EMISSION CONTROL ...... 28 2.9.2 WASTE WATER GENERATION, TREATMENT...... 29 2.9.3 SOLID WASTE GENERATION & MANAGEMENT ...... 30

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page i

2.10 ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY FOR THE RISK OF TECHNOLOGICAL FAILURE...... 31 CHAPTER-3 : DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ...... 32 3.1 GENERAL ...... 32 3.2 BASELINE STUDY AREA AND PERIOD ...... 32 3.3 ESTABLISHMENT OF BASELINE FOR VALUED ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS, AS IDENTIFIED IN THE SCOPE...... 34 3.3.1 MICROMETEOROLOGY ...... 34 3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT ...... 35 3.4.1 SELECTION OF SAMPLING LOCATIONS ...... 35 3.4.2 FREQUENCY AND PARAMETERS FOR SAMPLING ...... 37 3.4.3 AIR QUALITY OF STUDY AREA ...... 41 3.4.4 SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY ...... 43 ...... ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED. 3.4.5 INTERPRETATION OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY DATA ...... 44 3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...... 45 3.5.1 OBSERVATIONS ...... 46 3.5.2 INTERPRETATION OF NOISE DATA ...... 46 3.6 WATER ENVIRONMENT ...... 47 3.6.1 RECONNAISSANCE SURVEY ...... 47 3.6.2 SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS ...... 47 3.6.3 GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER RESOURCES ...... 47 3.6.4 SUMMARY OF GROUND WATER QUALITY ...... 52 3.6.5 INTERPRETATION OF GROUND WATER QUALITY DATA ...... 52 3.6.6 SUMMARY OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY ...... 52 3.6.7 INTERPRETATION OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY DATA ...... 52 3.7 SOIL ENVIRONMENT ...... 53 3.7.1 SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS ...... 53 3.7.2 OBSERVATIONS ...... 54 3.7.3 INTERPRETATION OF SOIL DATA ...... 54 3.8 LAND USE PATTERN OF STUDY AREA ...... 55 3.8.1 FINDINGS ...... 56 3.9 GEOLOGY & SOIL ...... 58 3.10 HYDROGEOLOGY ...... 60 3.11 DRAINAGE PATTERN ...... 60 3.12 SEISMIC STATUS ...... 62 3.13 SOCIO-ECONOMICS OF THE STUDY AREA ...... 62 3.13.1 SCOPE OF STUDY ...... 62 3.13.2 METHODOLOGY AND APPROACH ...... 63 3.13.3 STUDY AREA ...... 63 3.13.4 SOCIO-ECONOMIC STATUS OF PEOPLE LIVING IN THE STUDY AREA...... 66 3.13.5 VARIOUS FACILITIES AVAILABLE IN THE STUDY (PRIMARY SURVEY) ...... 69 3.14 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY...... 70 3.14.1 METHODOLOGY ...... 70 3.14.2 OBSERVATION OF BIODIVERSITY STUDY ...... 71

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page ii

3.15 CONCLUSION ...... 78 CHAPTER-4 : ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES ...... 79 4.1 INTRODUCTION ...... 79 4.2 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE...... 79 4.3 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE...... 81 4.3.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT ...... 81 4.3.2 WATER ENVIRONMENT ...... 82 4.3.3 SOIL ENVIRONMENT ...... 82 4.3.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...... 83 4.3.5 LAND USE/LAND COVER ...... 84 4.3.6 HYDROGEOLOGY ...... 84 4.3.7 GEOLOGY ...... 84 4.3.8 HAZARDOUS/ SOLID WASTE ...... 84 4.3.9 RISK/HAZARDOUS ...... 85 4.3.10 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY ...... 85 4.3.11 SOCIO-ECONOMY ...... 86 4.4 ASSESSMENT OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DURING OPERATION PHASE...... 87 4.5 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATIONMEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE ...... 89 4.5.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT ...... 89 4.5.2 EMISSION FROM STACK ...... 89 4.5.3 EMISSION FROM TRANSPORTATION VEHICLES ...... 93 4.5.4 WATER ENVIRONMENT ...... 95 4.5.5 SOIL ENVIRONMENT ...... 97 4.5.6 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...... 97 4.5.7 LAND USE/LAND COVER ...... 98 4.5.8 HYDROGEOLOGY ...... 98 4.5.9 GEOLOGY ...... 98 4.5.10 HAZARDOUS/SOLID WASTE ...... 98 4.5.11 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY ...... 99 4.5.12 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ...... 100 4.6 SUMMARY ...... 101 CHAPTER-5 : ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVE (TECHNOLOGY & SITE) ...... 103

5.1 ALTERNATIVE SITE ...... 103 5.2 ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGY ...... 103 5.3 SUMMARY ...... 104 CHAPTER-6 : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ...... 105

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page iii

6.1 MEASUREMENT METHODOLOGY, ATTRIBUTES AND IT’S MONITORING FREQUENCY. .... 105 6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL ...... 106 6.2.1 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL (EMC) ...... 106 6.3 REPORTING SCHEDULE ...... 107 6.4 BUDGET AND PROCUREMENT SCHEDULE ...... 107 6.5 SUMMARY ...... 108 CHAPTER-7 : ADDITIONAL STUDIES ...... 109 7.1 INTRODUCTION ...... 109 7.2 PUBLIC CONSULTATION ...... 109 7.2.1 ACTION PLAN FOR COMMITMENTS RAISED DURING PUBLIC HEARING ...... 112 7.3 RISK ASSESSMENT ...... 119 7.3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL & PUBLIC RECEPTORS ...... 119 7.3.2 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION & CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS ...... 119 7.3.3 HAZARD ASSESSMENT ...... 127 7.3.4 GENERAL RISK MITIGATION MEASURES ...... 128 7.3.5 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM ...... 130 7.4 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 130 7.4.1 DISASTERS ...... 130 7.4.2 OBJECTIVES OF DISASTER MANAGEMENT OF PLAN...... 131 7.4.3 EMERGENCIES ...... 131 7.4.4 EMERGENCY FACILITIES ...... 135 7.4.5 EMERGENCY ACTIONS ...... 136 7.5 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH ...... 137 7.6 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT ...... 139 7.7 RESETTLEMENT AND REHABILITATION ...... 141 CHAPTER-8 : PROJECT BENEFIT ...... 142

8.1 DIRECT EMPLOYMENT ...... 142 8.2 INDIRECT EMPLOYMENT ...... 142 8.3 DIRECT REVENUE EARNING TO THE NATIONAL AND STATE EXCHEQUER ...... 142 8.4 SUMMARY ...... 142 CHAPTER-9 : ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS ...... 143

9.1 APPLICABILITY OF CBA AND SUMMARY ...... 143 CHAPTER-10 : ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 144 10.0 INTRODUCTION ...... 144 10.1 ENVIRONMENT POLICY ...... 144 10.2 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL...... 145 10.2.1 INTERACTION WITH THE STATE POLLUTION CONTROL BOARD ...... 145 10.2.2 PROVIDE TRAINING ...... 145 10.2.3 OTHER RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CELL WILL INCLUDE ...... 146 10.2.4 SOP FOR FLOW OF INFORMATION ...... 147 10.3 EMP DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE ...... 148 10.3.1 LAND ENVIRONMENT ...... 148 10.3.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT ...... 148

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page iv

10.3.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT ...... 148 10.3.4 NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...... 148 10.3.5 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT ...... 148 10.3.6 SANITATION & SAFETY MEASURES OF CONSTRUCTION WORKERS ...... 148 10.3.7 MAINTENANCE OF VEHICLES ...... 149 10.4 EMP CONSIDERED DURING OPERATION PHASE ...... 149 10.4.1 AIR POLLUTION MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 149 10.4.2 ACTION PLAN FOR CONTROL AND MONITORING OF FUGITIVE EMISSIONS...... 149 10.4.3 NOISE POLLUTION MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 150 10.4.4 WATER POLLUTION MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 150 10.5 SOLID WASTE GENERATION & DISPOSAL ...... 151 10.6 MEASURES FOR IMPROVEMENT OF ECOLOGY ...... 153 10.6.1 GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT ...... 153 10.7 RAIN WATER HARVESTING PLAN ...... 154 10.8 ENERGY & NATURAL RESOURCE CONSERVATION MEASURES ...... 155 10.9 BUDGET FOR EMP...... 156 CHAPTER-11 : SUMMARY & CONCLUSION ...... 159

11.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION...... 159 11.2 DESCRIPTION OF BASELINE ENVIRONMENT ...... 166 11.3 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES ...... 167 11.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ...... 169 11.5 ADDITIONAL STUDY ...... 170 R&R ...... 170 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT ...... 173 11.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... 173 11.7 OVERALL JUSTIFICATION FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THE PROJRCT...... 173 CHAPTER-12 : DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED ...... 174 12.1 GENERAL ...... 174 12.2 INTRODUCTION OF ORGANIZATION ...... 174 12.3 ADDRESS & CONTACTS ...... 174 12.4 EIA CORDINATOR AND TEAM MEMBER ...... 175 12.5 LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING AND OTHER ANALYSIS ...... 176

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page v

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE 1.1 PROJECT CO-ORDINATE MAP ...... 4 FIGURE 2.1: LOCATION OF THE PROJECT ...... 9 FIGURE 2.2 EXISTING PROCESS AREA ...... 10 FIGURE 2.3 SITE PHOTOGRAPHS ...... 11 FIGURE 2.4 EXISTING GREEN AREA ...... 12 FIGURE 2.5 VICINITY MAP (500 MTR) SHOWING THE SITE AND SURROUNDINGS ...... 13 FIGURE 2.6 STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM) ...... 13 FIGURE 2.7 PLANT LAYOUT PLAN ...... 16 FIGURE 2.8 PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM FOR SPONGE IRON ...... 22 FIGURE 2.9 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHOWING MS INGOTS / BILLETS MANUFACTURING ...... 25 FIGURE 2.10 COMPLETE FLOW DIAGRAM ...... 28 FIGURE 3.1 STUDY AREA MAP ...... 33 FIGURE 3.2 WIND ROSE DIAGRAM OF 1ST OCTOBER 2020 TO 31ST OCTOBER 2020 ...... 35 FIGURE 3.3 MAP SHOWING THE STUDY REGION WITH LOCATIONS FOR AMBIENT AIR ...... 36 3 FIGURE 3.4 PM10 CONCENTRATION IN µG/M ...... 43 3 FIGURE 3.5 PM2.5 CONCENTRATION IN µG/M ...... 43 3 FIGURE 3.6 NO2 CONCENTRATION IN µG/M ...... 44 3 FIGURE 3.7 SO2 CONCENTRATION IN µG/M ...... 44 FIGURE 3.8 THE GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF NOISE LEVEL SURVEY ...... 46 FIGURE 3.9 GROUND WATER QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS ...... 49 FIGURE 3.10 SURFACE WATER QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS ...... 49 FIGURE 3.11 MAP SHOWING THE STUDY REGION WITH LOCATIONS FOR SOIL ...... 53 FIGURE 3.12 METHODOLOGY USED FOR LAND USE CLASSIFICATION ...... 55 FIGURE 3.13 LANDUSE MAP OF STUDY AREA ...... 56 FIGURE 3.14 DEM MAP OF STUDY AREA ...... 57 FIGURE 3.15 FALSE COLOR COMPOSITE (FCC) MAP OF STUDY AREA ...... 57 FIGURE 3.16 SOIL MAP OF BURDWAN DISTRICT ...... 59 FIGURE 3.17 HYDRO-GEOLOGICAL MAP OF BURDWAN DISTRICT ...... 60 FIGURE 3.18 DRAINAGE MAP OF 10 KM BUFFER AREA ...... 61 FIGURE 3.19 SEISMIC ZONE MAP OF INDIA ...... 62 FIGURE 4.1 IMPACTS VS. PROBABILITY CHART ...... 80

FIGURE 4.2 ISOPLETHS OF PM10 AROUND THE PROJECT ...... 92

FIGURE 4.3 ISOPLETHS OF SO2 AROUND THE PROJECT ...... 92 FIGURE 4.4 ISOPLETHS OF NOX AROUND THE PROJECT ...... 93 FIGURE 4.5 WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM ...... 96 FIGURE 7.1 PUBLIC HEARING PHOTOGRAPHS ...... 110 FIGURE 7.2 PUBLIC HEARING PHOTOGRAPHS ...... 111 FIGURE 10.1 ORGANIZATION CHART OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING CELL ...... 145

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page vi

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 1:1 PROPOSED PROJECT DETAILS ...... 1 TABLE 1:2: DETAILS OF PROJECT PROPONENT ...... 2 TABLE 1:3 : PILLAR CO-ORDINATES ...... 3 TABLE 2:1 ENVIRONMENTAL FEATURES WITHIN 10 KM. RADIUS OF THE PLANT SITE...... 14 TABLE 2:2 INDUSTRY LIST WITHIN 10 KM ...... 15 TABLE 2:3 EXISTING & EXPANSION FACILITY DETAILS ...... 17 TABLE 2:4 PROJECT COST...... 18 TABLE 2:5 LAND USE BREAKUP AFTER EXPANSION ...... 18 TABLE 2:6 WATER REQUIREMENT DETAILS ...... 18 TABLE 2:7 : RAW MATERIAL DETAILS FOR SPONGE IRON (1,20,000 TPA) ...... 19 TABLE 2:8 RAW MATERIAL FOR BILLETS (1,35,000 TPA) ...... 19 TABLE 2:9 RAW MATERIAL FOR ROLLING MILL (60,000 TPA)...... 19 TABLE 2:10 MATERIAL BALANCE DRI PLANT (SPONGE IRON) WITH SOUTH AFRICA COAL ...... 20 TABLE 2:11 MATERIAL BALANCE FOR BILLETS (TPA) ...... 20 TABLE 2:12 MATERIAL BALANCE FOR ROLLING MILL (TPA) ...... 20 TABLE 2:13 MATERIAL BALANCE FOR POWER PLANT (AFBC BOILER – 30 TON) ...... 20 TABLE 2:14 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF 200 TPD KILN (EXPANSION) ...... 22 TABLE 2:15 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF 100 TPD KILN (EXISTING) ...... 22 TABLE 2:16 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS COOLER DETAILS...... 22 TABLE 2:17 QUALITY OF SPONGE IRON ...... 23 TABLE 2:18 TECHNOLOGICAL PARAMETERS OF 15 TON INDUCTION FURNACE ...... 25 TABLE 2:19 TECHNOLOGICAL PARAMETERS OF CONTINUOUS CASTING MACHINE ...... 25 TABLE 2:20 MAJOR TECHNICAL PARAMETERS OF THE MILL ...... 27 TABLE 2:21 PROPOSED AIR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS ...... 28 TABLE 2:22 ETP EFFLUENT CHARACTERISTICS ...... 30 TABLE 2:23 INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT ...... 30 TABLE 2:24 MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE GENERATION & ITS DISPOSAL ...... 31 TABLE 3:1 FREQUENCY OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING ...... 33 TABLE 3:2 WEATHER SUMMARY DURING STUDY PERIOD ...... 34 TABLE 3:3 AMBIENT AIR SAMPLING STATIONS ...... 36 TABLE 3:4 SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY CONCENTRATIONS IN THE STUDY AREA ...... 41 TABLE 3:5 COMPARISON DATA (2020 & 2021) ...... 45 TABLE 3:6: NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS WERE LOCATED WITHIN THE STUDY AREA...... 45 TABLE 3:7 NOISE LEVELS IN STUDY AREA ...... 45 TABLE 3:8 WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS (GROUND & SURFACE WATER) ...... 47 TABLE 3:9: GROUND WATER ANALYSIS RESULT (OCT - 2020) ...... 50 TABLE 3:10 SURFACE WATER ANALYSIS (OCT- 2020) ...... 51 TABLE 3:11 : SOIL SAMPLING LOCATION ...... 53 TABLE 3:12 : SOIL QUALITY RESULT ...... 54 TABLE 3:13: LAND USE/ LAND COVER ANALYSIS ...... 56 TABLE 3:14 SUB DISTRICT WISE DISTRIBUTION OF SETTLEMENTS IN THE STUDY AREA ...... 63 TABLE 3:15 DEMOGRAPHIC PARTICULARS OF THE STUDY AREA ...... 64 TABLE 3:16 LIST OF NATURAL VEGETATION IN THE STUDY AREA ...... 71 TABLE 3:17 CLIMBER SPECIES IN THE STUDY AREA ...... 72 TABLE 3:18 GRASSES AND BAMBOOS ...... 72 TABLE 3:19 LIST OF VEGETABLE CROPS IN THE BUFFER ZONE ...... 73 TABLE 3:20 LIST OF NATURAL VEGETATION IN THE BUFFER ZONE ...... 73 TABLE 3:21 LIST OF AQUATIC PLANTS IN BUFFER ZONE ...... 75 TABLE 4:1 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION MATRIX (DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE) ...... 79 TABLE 4:2 SEVERITY CRITERIA FOR MAGNITUDE OF IMPACTS ...... 80 TABLE 4:3 CUMULATIVE SCORE RANGE FOR BENEFICIAL AND ADVERSE IMPACTS ...... 80 TABLE 4:4 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT MATRIX WITHOUT MITIGATION MEASURES (CONSTRUCTION PHASE) ...... 81 TABLE 4:5 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON AIR ENVIRONMENT ...... 81 TABLE 4:6 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON WATER ENVIRONMENT ...... 82 TABLE 4:7 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON SOIL ENVIRONMENT ...... 82

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page vii

TABLE 4:8 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT...... 83 TABLE 4:9 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON LAND USE DETAILS ...... 84 TABLE 4:10 IMPACT DUE TO HAZARDOUS/SOLID WASTE AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES ...... 84 TABLE 4:11 IMPACT DUE TO RISK & HAZARDS AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES ...... 85 TABLE 4:12 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY...... 85 TABLE 4:13 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ...... 86 TABLE 4:14 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT MATRIX WITH MITIGATION MEASURES (CONSTRUCTION PHASE) ...... 86 TABLE 4:15 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT MATRIX WITHOUT MITIGATION MEASURES (DURING OPERATION PHASE)...... 87 TABLE 4:16 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT MATRIX WITHOUT MITIGATION MEASURES (DURING OPERATION PHASE)...... 88 TABLE 4:17 EMISSION INVENTORY OF THE STEEL PLANT ...... 90 TABLE 4:18 IMPACT OF AIR QUALITY OF THE STUDY AREA DUE TO THE PROPOSED PROJECT ...... 91 TABLE 4:19 IMPACT OF AIR QUALITY OF THE STUDY AREA (WORST CASE, APCD WORKING AT 50% EFFICIENCY) (24-H AVG IN µG/M3) ...... 93 TABLE 4:20 TRAFFIC SCENARIO ...... 94 TABLE 4:21 RECOMMENDATIONS ON TRAFFIC CAPACITY AS PER IRC 2010 ...... 94 TABLE 4:22 MODIFIED TRAFFIC SCENARIO ...... 95 TABLE 4:23 WATER REQUIREMENT DETAILS ...... 96 TABLE 4:24 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...... 97 TABLE 4:25 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON NOISE ENVIRONMENT ...... 97 TABLE 4:26 IMPACT DUE TO HAZARDOUS/SOLID WASTE AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES ...... 98 TABLE 4:27 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY...... 99 TABLE 4:28 IMPACT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC ...... 100 TABLE 4:29 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT MATRIX WITH MITIGATION MEASURES (OPERATION PHASE) ...... 101 TABLE 6:1 COST OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ...... 107 TABLE 7:1 POSSIBLE RISKS FROM THE STEEL PLANT & MITIGATION MEASURES ...... 119 TABLE 7:2 PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS RELATED TO INDUCTION FURNACE & NECESSARY RISK CONTROL MEASURES ...... 122 TABLE 7:3 PROCESS HAZARD ANALYSIS RELATED TO ROLLING MILLS & NECESSARY RISK CONTROL MEASURES ...... 124 TABLE 10:1 INLET AND OUTLET CHARACTERISTICS OF TREATED PROCESS EFFLUENT ...... 151 TABLE 10:2 INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT ...... 151 TABLE 10:3 MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE GENERATION & ITS DISPOSAL ...... 152 TABLE 10:4 TYPICAL COMPOSITION OF SOLID WASTE ...... 152 TABLE 10:5: PROPOSED PLANT SPECIES WITH LOCAL NAMES FOR EXPANSION PROJECT ...... 154 TABLE 10:6 INVESTMENT ON ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION MEASURES (RS. IN LAKHS) ...... 156 TABLE 11:1 PROJECT CAPACITY ...... 159 TABLE 11:2 PILLAR CO-ORDINATES ...... 160 TABLE 11:3 ENVIRONMENTAL FEATURES WITHIN 10 KM. RADIUS OF THE PLANT SITE ...... 161 TABLE 11:4 LAND BREAK-UP ...... 162 TABLE 11:5 WATER REQUIREMENT DETAILS ...... 162 TABLE 11:6 MATERIAL BALANCE FOR SPONGE IRON (1,20,000 TPA)...... 163 TABLE 11:7 MATERIAL BALANCE FOR BILLETS (1,35,000 TPA) ...... 163 TABLE 11:8 MATERIAL BALANCE FOR ROLLING MILL (60,000 TPA) ...... 163 TABLE 11:9 MATERIAL BALANCE FOR POWER PLANT (AFBC BOILER – 30 TON) ...... 163 TABLE 11:10 INDUSTRIAL WASTE MANAGEMENT (TPA) ...... 164 TABLE 11:11 MONITORING PROGRAM ...... 169

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page viii

CHAPTER-1 : INTRODUCTION

1.1 PURPOSE OF REPORT M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt Ltd. is one of the distinguished manufacturers who are engaged in making of one of the most useful and versatile material, Sponge Iron. The registered office of this company is situated at 20B, Abdul Hamid Street, East India House, Block No-7A, 7th Floor, Kolkata-700069, West Bengal. Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd. has established a steel plant in Mangalpur Industrial area, Raniganj, West Bengal. The plant started in 2002, for production of Sponge Iron of total capacity 60,000 TPA. Consent to Operate was issued by West Bengal Pollution Control Board. Copy of CTO is enclosed as Annexure-I. In 2019 company planned for expansion of the plant by adding Billet Production (1,35,000 TPA) and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA). The category of the project was B under schedule 3(a) Metallurgical industries (ferrous & non-ferrous). Company had applied for obtaining environment clearance to SEIAA, WB on 19.12.2019 for Billet Production (1,35,000 TPA) and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA). ToR was granted by SEIAA, WB vide letter No: - 52-2N- 74/2019(E) dated: - 28.01.2020. Meanwhile, company have planned for further expansion by adding Sponge Iron (60,000 TPA) and 15 MW captive power of Schedule 3 (a) Metallurgical industries (ferrous & non- ferrous) of EIA Notification, 2006 and its amendments thereof. Therefore, company had submitted the application for Term of Reference for the production of Sponge Iron (1,20,000 TPA), Billet Production (1,35,000 TPA), Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA) and Captive Power Plant (15 MW) to MOEF&CC vide proposal no. IA/WB/IND/171518/2020, dated:- 5th September, 2020 in prescribed Form -I and other documents. Table 1:1 Proposed Project Details Sponge Iron Production Existing Expansion Total Capacity No of Rotary Kiln 02 No’s 01 No’s Capacity of Rotary Kiln 100 TPD 200 TPD Production capacity per day 200 Ton 200 Ton 1,20,000 TPA No. of days operation per day 300 300 Installed Capacity Per Annum 60,000 TPA 60,000 TPA Billets Production No of Induction Furnace 3 No. Melting Capacity of Induction Furnace 15 Ton Each

No of Heat per Day 10 Nil 1,35,000 TPA Production capacity per day 450 Ton

No. of days operation per day 300 Installed Capacity Per Annum 1,35,000 TPA Rolling Mill

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 1

No of Re-heating Furnace 01 No Melting Capacity of Furnace 10 Ton Each Production capacity per day Nil 200 Ton 60,000 TPA No. of days operation per day 300 Days Installed Capacity Per Annum 60,000 TPA Captive Power Plant Power Plant

 WHRB Boiler (03 No’s) 2 x 10 TPH-4MW Nil 1 x 22 TPH-4MW 15 MW

 AFBC Boiler (01 No’s) 1 x 30 TPH-7MW MoEFCC issued Standard Terms of References (TOR) for conducting the EIA studies Vide F. No:-J-11011/253/2020-IA.II (I) dated 26th October 2020 and submitting the same to WBPCB for conducting public hearing. Public hearing was conducted on 5-1-2021. Final EIA report has been prepared after incorporating the comments and suggestions obtained during public hearing and submitted to MOEF&CC. The Final EIA will be appraised by the Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry-1) at MOEF&CC, New Delhi for grant of EC. 1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT 1.2.1 Identification of Project M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd, has taken a decision for Expansion of Sponge iron production from 60,000 TPA to 1,20,000 TPA along with Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and additional facility of MS Billets Production (1,35,000 TPA), and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal -713347. 1.2.2 Project Proponent M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd.is promoted by following directors:- Table 1:2: Details of Project Proponent SL. No Name of the Directors Work Experience

1 Mr. Gopal Kumar Agarwal All have vast experience in the field of Steel industry. The company is promoted by 2 Mr. Rahul Agarwal technically qualified and professionally experienced technocrats who crave for 3 Mrs. Urmila Devi Agarwal innovation and value addition.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 2

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE, LOCATION OF THE PROJECT AND ITS IMPORTANCE TO THE COMPANY REGION 1.3.1 Nature & Size of Project M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd, has taken a decision for Expansion of Sponge iron production from 60,000 TPA to 1,20,000 TPA along with Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and additional facility of MS Billets Production (1,35,000 TPA), and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA). “The project falls under Category ‘A’ of Schedule 3 (a), as per the EIA Notification, 2006 & its amendment till date.” 1.3.2 Location of Project The project site is at Plot G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, Raniganj, Distt- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal, NH-2 is at distance of about 300 m from Project Site towards ENE direction. The nearest Railway Station is Raniganj Railway Station, which is located about 3.0 km distance from the project site towards West direction. Raniganj city is located at about 1.0 km distance from the Project site towards West direction. Kazi Nazrul Islam Airport, Durgapur is 10 km away from the site in East direction. River Damodar is flowing at a distance of 4.0 km from the Project site towards SW direction. There is no nalla in the existing plant area. No National Park/sanctuary falls within 10 km of the plant area. The location is in Seismic Zone-III. The Co-ordinates of the project site are given below:-

Table 1:3 : Pillar Co-ordinates S. No Latitude Longitude 1 23°36'42.43"N 87° 8'35.34"E 2 23°36'40.58"N 87° 8'37.48"E 3 23°36'44.77"N 87° 8'41.56"E 4 23°36'38.75"N 87° 8'47.52"E 5 23°36'34.79"N 87° 8'43.19"E 6 23°36'37.21"N 87° 8'39.71"E 7 23°36'35.92"N 87° 8'36.57"E 8 23°36'30.60"N 87° 8'36.54"E 9 23°36'30.97"N 87° 8'42.37"E 10 23°36'29.42"N 87° 8'41.69"E 11 23°36'29.12"N 87° 8'37.96"E 12 23°36'28.33"N 87° 8'37.45"E 13 23°36'28.92"N 87° 8'35.57"E

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 3

Figure 1.1 Project Co-ordinate Map

1.3.3 Importance of Project to the Country & Region  Steel has been regarded as the most useful product for mankind.  The Government has released the National Steel Policy 2017, which has laid down the broad roadmap for encouraging long term growth for the Indian steel industry, both on demand and supply sides, by 2030-31.  It has a wide range of applications from a small pin to the manufacture of automobiles,  Building of the railway systems, ships, big construction projects, housing, etc.  All these products play a key role in the growth of a country's more important sectors like  Construction, power, oil and gas, engineering, railway and road transportation, port, irrigation etc.

Importance of the Project to the Region

The project will contribute to government treasury by way of direct and indirect taxes. The project will employ 300 persons after expansion and provide in-direct employment to 100 persons in transport, upkeep & maintenance, ancillary units. Local people 50-100 will get employment during the construction stage. 1.4 SCOPE OF THE STUDY MOEFCC issued Standard Term of Reference for conducting EIA study of the proposed expansion of Sponge Iron plant from 60000 TPA to 120000 TPA, new Induction furnace for

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 4

Production of 1,35,000 TPA Billets, new Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA) and 15 MW Captive Power Plant (WHRB+AFBC) vide letter No:-J-11011/253/2020-IA.II (I). Baseline data was generated during the period 17-12-2019 to 16-3-2020 (by the earlier consultant lab) and 1-10-2020 to 31-10-2020 (data validated for one month by present consultant lab). Draft EIA/EMP Report was submitted to West Bengal Pollution Control Board and Public Hearing was held on 05.01.2021 at Muralidhar Bhawan, NSB Road, Near Anjana Cinema, Raniganj, WB. The EIA report is prepared as per the “Generic Structure of Environmental Impact Assessment Document (Appendix III of EIA Notification), taking into account the Terms of Reference issued by MoEF&CC, New Delhi. The report has been prepared using the following references:-  Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Metallurgical industries (ferrous & non-ferrous), Prepared by Ministry of Environment and Forests.  Form-1 as per EIA Notification, 14th September, 2006  Pre-Feasibility Report as per Ministry’s OM dated:- 30th December, 2010  Baseline data generated from the area and collected from secondary sources In addition, other relevant standards for individual activities such as sampling and testing of environmental attributes have been followed. 1.5 STRUCTURE OF EIA REPORT S.No EIA Structure Contents 1. Introduction . Purpose of the Report . Identification of Project and Project Proponent . Brief description of nature, size, location of the project and its importance to the country, region. . Scope of the Study – details of regulatory scoping carried out (As per terms of reference). . Site Selection Criteria 2. Project Condensed description of those aspects of the project (based on Description project feasibility study), likely to cause environmental effects. Description contains the details of the following: . Type of Project . Need for the Project . Location details showing general location, specific location, project boundary and project site layout. . Size or Magnitude of Operation . Project description including drawings showing project layout, components of project etc. . Proposed schedule for approval and implementation, . Technology and Process Description,

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 5

S.No EIA Structure Contents . Schematic representations of the feasibility drawings which give information important for EIA purpose. . Description of mitigation measures incorporated into the project to meet environmental standards, environmental operating conditions, or other EIA requirements 3. Description of . Study Area, Period, Components and Methodology. the . Establishment of baseline for valued Environmental Environment Components, as identified in the scope. . Study Period: 17th Dec., 2019 to 16th March., 2020. . Additional study during Oct-2020 . Base maps of all Environmental Components. 4. Anticipated . Details of Investigated Environmental impacts due to project Environmental location, possible accidents, project design, project Impacts and construction, regular operations. Mitigation . Measures for minimizing and/or offsetting adverse impacts Measures identified. . Irreversible and Irretrievable commitments of environmental components. . Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for determining significance, Assigning significance), . Impact scores and Mitigation Measures. . Air Modeling. 5. Analysis of In case, the scoping exercise results in need for alternatives: Alternatives . Description of each alternative (Technology . Selection of alternative and Site) 6. Environmental Technical aspects of environmental monitoring for the Monitoring effectiveness of mitigation measures (including measurement Program methodologies, frequency, location, data analysis, reporting schedules, emergency procedures, detailed budget and procurement schedules) 7. Additional . Risk Assessment Studies . DMP 8. Project . Improvements in physical infrastructure, Benefits . Improvements in social infrastructure, . Employment potential – Skilled; semi-skilled and unskilled, . Other tangible benefits of the project 9. Environmental During the scoping/ToR stage, no recommendation of Cost Benefit environmental cost benefit analysis was suggested by the Analysis appraisal committee. 10. Environment . Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring that Management mitigation measures are implemented and their effectiveness

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 6

S.No EIA Structure Contents Plan monitored, after approval of the EIA. . Explanation of how, adverse effects have been mitigated. 11. Summary and Overall justification for implementation of the project, Conclusion 12. Disclosure of The names of the Consultants engaged with their brief resume Consultant and nature of consultancy rendered. Engaged 1.6 LAWS APPLICABLE TO THIS PROJECT S.No Activity Legal 1. Manufacturing  The Factories Act, 1948.  The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 and Rules, 1975, as amended to date.  The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 and Rules, 1982, as amended to date.  Environment Impact Assessment Notification, dated 14th September 2006, as amended on 1st December, 2009.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 7

CHAPTER-2 : PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 TYPE OF THE PROJECT M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd, has taken a decision for Expansion of Sponge iron production from 60,000 TPA to 1,20,000 TPA along with Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and additional facility of MS Billets Production (1,35,000 TPA), and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal -713347. “The proposed project falls under Category “A”, as per EIA notification – 2006 and it’s amendment till date by the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, New Delhi and requires Environment Clearance from MoEF&CC. Project is not interlinked and interdependent” 2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT Steel is a basic commodity for economic growth of any country and the per capita consumption is a measure of prosperity of a country. The per capita steel consumption has risen from 38 kg in 2005-06 to 61 kg in 2017-18, compared to global average of 208 kg. The per capita steel consumption in rural sector is only 10 kg. The crude steel production capacity had increased from 22 million tonnes per annum (MTPA) in 1991-92 to 91 MTPA in 2015-16 (installed capacity is 122 MTPA). The Indian steel industry is ranked 3rd in the world and has tremendous potential for growth. The proposed project will bridge the demand supply gap of steel in the country. The project will add revenue to the Government by way of direct and indirect taxes. Importance of the Project to the Region: The project will contribute to government treasury by way of direct and indirect taxes. The project will employ 300 persons after expansion and provide in-direct employment to 600 persons in transport, upkeep & maintenance, ancillary units. 2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT (MAPS SHOWING GENERAL LOCATION,SPECIFIC LOCATION, PROJECT BOUNDARY & PROJECT SITE LAYOUT). The project site is at G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, Raniganj, Distt- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal, NH-2 is at distance of about 0.30 km from Project Site towards ENE direction. The nearest Railway Station is Raniganj Railway Station, which is located about 3.0 km distance from the project site towards West direction. Raniganj city is located at about 1.0 km distance from the Project site towards WNW direction. The distance of NH-60 is about 3.0 km from the Project site towards West direction. The nearest important Airport is Kazi Nazrul Islam Airport Airport, Durgapur, which is situated at about 10.5 km distance in East direction from the project site. The other important Airport is Netaji Subhas Chandra Bose International (NSCBI) Airport, Kolkata, which is situated at about 170 km distance in South-East direction from the project site.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 8

Figure 2.1: Location of the Project

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 9

15.10.2020

Figure 2.2 Existing Process Area

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 10

Admin Building 15.10.2020

Main Entry/Exit 15.10.2020

Figure 2.3 Site Photographs

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 11

15.10.2020

15.10.2020 15.10.2020

Figure 2.4 Existing Green Area

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 12

Figure 2.5 Vicinity Map (500 mtr) Showing the Site and Surroundings

Figure 2.6 Study Area Map (10 km)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 13

2.3.1 Environmental Setting within 10 Km. Radius of the Plant Site The following is the environmental setting within the 10 Km. radius of the plant site: Table 2:1 Environmental features within 10 Km. radius of the plant site SL.N Salient Features / Environmental Distance W.R.T. Site / Remarks o Features 1 Type of Land Industrial Land 2 Type of land ( Study area) As per LULC the land use within 10 Km. is as follows: Settlement-28.25%, Sand-2.58%, Water Bodies-2.04%, Forest-0.98%, Industrial- 6.91%, Mining-2.53%, Open Scrub-45.01% and Agriculture Land-12.68% 3 National Park/ Wild life Not Present Within Study Area sanctuary/Biosphere reserve/ Tiger Reserve/migratory routes for Birds/Corridor 4 Historical places/Places of Tourist Not Present Within Study Area importance/Archeological sites 5 Industrial areas/cluster/Critically Not Present Within Study Area polluted area as per MoEF&CC Office Memorandum dated 13th January 2010. 6 Defense Installations Not Present Within Study Area 7 Nearest village Mangalpur – 0.70 km (South) 8 No. of villages in the study area 36 9 Forests Gangajalghati PF – 5.5 km –SSW 10 Water body Damodar River – 4.0 km – SW Mejia Lake – 6.0 km – SW 11 Highway NH-2 = 0.3 km = ENE NH-60 = 2.8 km = W 12 Railway Station Raniganj RS – 2.8 km – West 13 Fort facility Not Present Within Study Area 14 Airport/Airstrip Kazi Nazrul Islam Airport – 10.5 km – East 15 Interstate Border Not Present Within Study Area 16 R & R issues None 17 Forests & Wildlife issues None 18 Road, Nalla, Transmission Line None diversion issues 19 Litigation / court case is pending Nil against the proposed project / proposed site and or any direction

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 14

passed by the court of law against the project

2.3.2 List of Industries within 10 Km. Radius of the Plant Site

Following are list of Industries within 10 kms. radius of the plant site:-

Table 2:2 Industry List within 10 km S.No Industries Name Distance Direction 1 Jai Balaji Industries 0.3 SE 2 Shyam SEL Ltd. 0.1 ENE 3 Shyam Super Cement 0.05 NNE 4 Durgapur Steel Thermal Power Station 6.5 ESE 5 Sabitri Sponge Iron Plant 2 NW 6 Ambuja Cement Ltd. 1.8 NW

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 15

Figure 2.7 plant layout plan

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 16

2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION (INCL. ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES REQUIRED BY OR FOR THE PROJECT) 2.4.1 Size or Magnitude of Operation Expansion of Sponge iron production from 60,000 TPA to 1, 20,000 TPA along with Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and additional facility of MS Billets Production (1,35,000 TPA), and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA) Table 2:3 Existing & Expansion Facility Details Sponge Iron Production Existing Expansion Total Capacity No of Rotary Kiln 02 No’s 01 No’s 100 Capacity of Rotary Kiln 200 TPD TPD Production capacity per day 200 Ton 200 Ton 1,20,000 TPA No. of days operation per day 300 300 60,000 Installed Capacity Per Annum 60,000 TPA TPA Billets Production No of Induction Furnace 3 No. Melting Capacity of Induction 15 Ton Each Furnace No of Heat per Day Nil 10 1,35,000 TPA Production capacity per day 450 Ton No. of days operation per day 300 Installed Capacity Per Annum 1,35,000 TPA Rolling Mill No of Re-heating Furnace 01 No Melting Capacity of Furnace 10 Ton Production capacity per day Nil 200 Ton 60,000 TPA No. of days operation per day 300 Days Installed Capacity Per Annum 60,000 TPA Captive Power Plant Power Plant

 WHRB Boiler (03 No’s) 2 x 10 TPH-4MW 8 MW Nil 1 x 22 TPH-4MW

 AFBC Boiler (01 No’s) 1 x 30 TPH-7MW 7 MW 2.4.2 Project Cost The overall estimated project cost for the proposed unit is 171.0 Cr. after expansion. Details are shown below- SL.No Existing Project Cost Expansion Project Cost Total Cost 1 14.68 Cr 156.32 Cr 171.0 Cr

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd. Page 17

Table 2:4 Project Cost SL.No Details Amount (Cr) 1 Existing Project Cost 14.68 2 New Land Cost 1.55 3 DRI unit 26.94 4 Induction Furnace 22.71 5 CPP 69.65 6 Rolling Mill 35.46 Total Project Cost 170.99 say 171 2.4.3 Details of Land Total existing land is 5.84 Ha and land requirement for the proposed expansion is about 2.46 Ha. Sl.No Existing Expansion Total Project Area after Expansion 1 5.84 Ha 2.46 Ha 8.30 Ha

Table 2:5 Land Use Breakup after Expansion SL.No Details Area (Ha) Percentage 1 Built-up Area 2.53 30.48% 2 Storage area for raw material, Products 1.21 14.57% 3 Greenbelt area 2.74 33.01% 4 Internal Roads/Open area/Parking/ 1.82 21.92% Solid waste storage area Total Land 8.30 100% Total land is under the possession of project proponent and falls within industrial estate. 2.4.4 Water Requirement No water is required in the sponge iron and steel manufacturing process. Water will be used only for cooling purpose. Total Water requirement will be 574 KLD and will be sourced from Asansol Durgapur Development Authority. Permission for the same has been obtained vide Letter No-ADDA/DGP/ED/CN-65/03-04/924 dated: -27.09.2004. Now we have also applied for additional water supply to Asansol Durgapur Development Authority. Copies of both are enclosed as Annexure-II. Table 2:6 Water Requirement Details Particulars Existing Expansion After Expansion (KLD) (KLD) (KLD) DRI Unit 135 135 270 Water for CPP -- 190 190 Billets Production -- 50 50 (Induction Furnace) Rolling Mill -- 50 50 Domestic-Use 6 8 14 Total 141 433 574

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 18

2.4.5 Power Requirement & Backup.

Existing power requirement is 0.60 MW and additionally 20.5 MW power will be required for the expansion project and 15 MW will be sourced form CPP and remaining will be from government supply. 2 x 500 KVA DG set will be installed to meet the power requirement during load shedding/ emergency. 2.4.6 Raw Material Required Along Estimated Quantity, Likely Source &Marketing Area Of Final Product/S Mode Of Transport Of Raw Material And Finished Product. Total Raw material requirement along with approx. quantity for Sponge Iron are given in below table:- Table 2:7 : Raw Material Details for Sponge Iron (1,20,000 TPA) S.No Name Quantity Source Transportation Distance w.r.t (TPA) Project Site 1 Iron ore Captive mines, Through Rail Between lumps purchase from /Road 300 to 350 1,80,000 NMDC/ OMDC KMs /other mines 2 Coal Purchase from CIL, Through sea Between 132,000 Imported from SA route/rail route 20 – 250 KMs. / by road 3 Dolomite Local purchase Road through Between 3,600 covered trucks 20 – 40 KMs Total 3,15,600

Total raw material requirement along with approx. quantity for production of Billet is depicted in the table below:

Table 2:8 Raw Material for Billets (1,35,000 TPA) SL.No Name Quantity (TPA) Source Transportation Distance w.r.t Plant 1 Sponge 1,20,000 In house Internal Captive Iron Movement Consumption 2 Pig Iron 18,000 Local Road through Between Purchase covered trucks 20 – 40 KMs 3 Scrap 30,000 Local Road through Between Purchase covered trucks 20 – 40 KMs Total 1,68,000

Total material requirement for production of Steel Rolled Products is given below: Table 2:9 Raw Material for Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA) Raw Material Quantity of Source Transportation Distance w.r.t requirement Raw Plant Material Billet 64,920 TPA In-house Internal Movement Captive Consumption CBM Gas 24,00,000 Local Through Pipelines Between (SM3/Annum) Purchase 02 – 03 KMs

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 19

Table 2:10 Material Balance DRI Plant (Sponge Iron) with South Africa Coal

SL.No INPUT Quantity, TPA OUTPUT Quantity, TPA 1 Iron Ore Lumps 1,80,000 Sponge Iron 1,20,000 2 Coal 132,000 Dolochar 36,000 Dust from ESP/Bag 3 Dolomite 3,600 15,000 filter LOI / Reaction Gases 1,44,000

Accretion 600

Total 3,15,600 Total 3,15,600

Table 2:11 Material Balance for Billets (TPA) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity 1 Sponge Iron 1,20,000 Billets 1,35,000 2 Pig Iron 18,000 Slag 24000 3 Scrap 30,000 LOI and Dust 9500 Total Total 1,68,500 1,68,500

Table 2:12 Material Balance for Rolling Mill (TPA) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity 1 Billets 64,920 TMT Bars/ Structural steel 60,000 2 Mill scales 1,000 3 End Cuttings 2,320 Total 64,920 Total 64,920

Table 2:13 Material Balance for Power Plant (AFBC Boiler – 30 Ton) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity 1 Coal Imported 10,500 Power 7 MW 2 Dolochar (In-house) 36,000 Ash 22,600 TPA Gases 23,900 TPA Total 46,500 Total 46,500

2.5 EMPLOYMENT GENERATION (DIRECT & INDIRECT) DUE TO THE PROJECT. The existing plan employs 130 people. There will be employment of 170 people during the operation phase of the expansion of project. which include manager, supervisor, skilled and unskilled workers, etc. During the construction phase of the project, 100 people will get employment on daily average basis. Approximately 100 persons will get indirect employment in transport, upkeep & maintenance, ancillary units.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 20

2.6 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION

Construction and other project related activities will be started after getting Environmental Clearance (EC) from EAC (Industry-1), MoEF&CC, New Delhi. It is estimated that Implementation of project will be completed within 12 months, considering EC obtained day as zero date. 2.7 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION  Sponge Iron Production (DRI-Plant) The Direct Reduced Iron (DRI) plant will comprise of existing 2 nos. of 100 TPD kilns and 200 TPD Kiln and related accessories including Waste Heat Recovery power generating unit. The major plant facilities for the Sponge Iron plant envisaged are as follows:  Day bins;  Rotary Kiln & Cooler;  Central Control Room;  Product processing and product storage; and  Off gas system including waste heat recovery power generation. A refractory lined rotary kiln will be used for reduction of Iron ore in solid state. A central Burner located at the discharge end will be used for initial heating of the kiln. Iron ore will be continuously fed into the kiln along with coal which has dual role of fuel as well as reductant. Dolomite will be added to scavenge the Sulphur from the coal. A number of air tubes will be provided along the length of the kiln. The desired temperature profile will be maintained by controlling the volume of the combustion air through these tubes. The Carbon monoxide generated due to the combustion of coal, reduces the iron ore and converts it into sponge iron. The rotary kiln is primarily divided into two zones viz. the pre-heating zone and the reduction zone. The preheating zone extends over 30 to 50 % of the length of the kiln and in this the moisture in the charge will be driven off and the volatile matter in the coal will be burnt with the combustion air supplied through the air tubes. Heat from the combustion rises the temperature of the lining and the bed surface. As the kiln rotates, the lining transfers the heat to the charge. Charge material, pre-heated to about 1000oC enters the reduction zone. Temperature of the order of 1050oC will be maintained in the reduction zone, which is the appropriate temperature for solid state reduction of iron oxide to metallic iron. This hot material will be transferred to rotary cooler. In rotary cooler the material will cool from 1000oC to 100oC in cooler by spraying water. The cooler discharge material consists of sponge iron lumps, sponge iron fines and char. Magnetic and non-magnetic material will be separated through magnetic separators and stored in separate bins. The process flow diagram of sponge iron is given in figure 2.9 below.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 21

Finished product handling: Required conveyor system for conveying the material from cooler to finished storage bins will be provided. The cooler discharge shall be passed through magnetic separator which will separate the sponge iron from dolochar and both these materials will be stored in separate bins. Dolochar will be sent to power plant and sponge iron will be sent to SMS bunkers by mean of conveyors.

Figure 2.8 Process Flow Diagram for Sponge Iron

Table 2:14 Technical Parameters of 200 TPD Kiln (Expansion) SL.No Parameters UOM Description 1 Effective Diameter of Kiln Meters 3.15 m 2 Length of Kiln Meters 60 m 3 Support No’s 03 nos. 4 Kiln Speed rpm 0.40 to 0.80 Table 2:15 Technical Parameters of 100 TPD Kiln (Existing) SL.No Parameters UOM Description 1 Effective Diameter of Kiln Meters 2.6 m 2 Length of Kiln Meters 42 m 3 Support No’s 02 nos. 4 Kiln Speed rpm 0.40 to 0.80

Table 2:16 Technical Parameters Cooler Details SL.No Parameters UOM Description 1 Diameter of cooler Meters 2.80 2 Length of cooler Meters 30.00 3 Support Roller Station Nos 2

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 22

4 Slope % 2.5 5 Cooler Speed rpm 1.2(max) 6 Production TPD 200 7 Generation of DRI fines (- % 15% 3 mm), 8 Working day Day 300 9 Shift per day Nos 3

Table 2:17 Quality of Sponge Iron SL.No Parameters UOM Description 1 Degree of metallization % 90 + /-1 2 Fe(t) % 92+/-1 3 Fe(m) % 83+/-1 4 Ferrous Oxide (FeO) % 11+/-1 5 Alumina (Al2O3) % 2-3 6 Silica(SiO2) % 3-5 7 Magnesium Oxide(MgO) % 0.03 8 Calcium oxide (CaO) % 0.52 9 Carbon % 0.10 to 0.12 10 Phosphorus (P) % 0.07 max. 11 Sulphur (S) % 0.015 12 Generation of DRI fines(-3 mm), % In pellet sponge 5% max  Steel Melting Shop Production of Hot Metal Sponge Iron will be melted along with melting scrap and fluxes to make pure liquid steel / Hot metal. The Hot metal produced will be directly sent to Rolling Mill through Hot Charging method. In this method of Steel Melting Shop consists of following units:-  Induction Furnace  Ladles  Ladle Refining Furnace  Continuous Casting Machine (CCM) Induction Furnace Induction Furnaces is a device to melt the charge material using electrical power. It consists of Crucible lined with water cooled induction coils, Electrical system to give controlled power to induction coil, Hydraulic tilting system, Heat exchanger to cool the circulating water, water softener for generating soft water, furnace transformer, Power Factor improvement system and surge suppressor. Ladle

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 23

Ladles are pots with refractory lining inside to withstand 16000C temperature. It has side arms so that can be lifted with the help of crane. Ladles are used to stores the liquid steel / Hot Metal from Induction Furnace. Ladles are with bottom nozzle and pneumatically operated gate for discharge of liquid. The Liquid Steel / Hot metal will be sent directly to Rolling Mill for manufacturing Rolled Products. Cranes: Electric Over-head (EOT) cranes of various capacities are used to carry the ladles/materials at different places. Cranes are used in Melting hall to charge melting scrap, remove the ladles to the LRF, further to place it over the Tundish of the Continuous Caster, to remove billets from the cooling bed and store at designated places, and also for other petty use. Accordingly, the sizes, capacity and numbers of cranes are decided. Continuous Casting Machine (CCM): CCM is used to continuously cast the liquid steel in required cross section and in length. It consists of Tundish, Mould, Bow with Withdrawal mechanism, straightening mechanism and cooling bed, hydraulic system for withdrawal mechanism, water pumps and cooling towers for water spray on the withdrawn section as well as on the cooling bed. Dummy bar is provided to start the casting. Tundish is a rectangular vessel, lined with refractory and having discharge nozzle with pneumatically operated gate. A stand is erected over it where the ladle is stationed for discharging the liquid in it. Mould is of copper with water cooled jacked. Its cross-section in the bottom is of the size of which billet is to be drawn. Initially the dummy for of the same size is kept inserted. When the liquid steel is poured in the mould, the dummy bar is drawn slowly, so that the liquid steel in partially frozen state comes out of the mould. Water spray nozzles are installed to spray water over the just drawn billet to cool it further and to harden the skin of the drawn billet. MS Ingot/Billet will be produced in Continuous Casting Machine. MS Billets will be produced in Continuous Casting Machine (2-strands) for making billets. The process flow diagram of Induction Furnace unit is given in figure 2.9 below:-

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 24

Figure 2.9 Schematic Diagram showing MS Ingots / Billets Manufacturing Table 2:18 Technological parameters of 15 Ton Induction Furnace SL.No Parameter Value / Features 1 Number of furnaces 3 2 Number of crucibles per IF 2 3 Furnace capacity( T) 15 M.T. 4 Tilting arrangement Hydraulic System 5 Forward tilt Hydraulic Cylinder 6 Metallic charge Sponge Iron + Scrap + Pig Iron 7 Method of charging By EOT Crane & Electro magnet 8 Melting rate 7.5MT/hr/Furnace 9 Operating frequency 200 – 400 Hz 10 No. of transformer taps 7 11 Primary voltage 33 KV Table 2:19 Technological parameters of Continuous Casting machine SL.No Parameter Unit Value/Features 1 No. of machine No 1 2 Type of machine -- Radial type 3 Base radius m 6/11 4 Size of cast square billets mm 150 Sq & 160 Sq 5 Design casting speed for square m/mm 2.5 - 3.2 per stand 6 Casting practice -- Open casting 7 No. of heats/day/FurnaceIn sequenceNo 10 casting No 8 Average heat weight T 40-45

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 25

9 Operating days / year No 300 10 Annual production T 135000 11 Length of billet M 6 m 12 Tundish capacity T 3.5 M.T. 13 Billet cutting -- Hydraulic Shearing 14 Steel grades -- M.S.  Rolling Mill The Rolled products will be manufactured using the following methods: Rolling Mill With Heating Furnace / Conventional Rolling Mill A pusher type furnace has been envisaged for the heating of Ingots / Billets. The furnace will be end charging and side discharging. It will have single row as well as double row charging facility. The furnace combustion system will comprise of air blowers, supply and preheating system and other associated facilities. The product of combustion will leave the furnace at charging end and exhausted through underground flue tunnel and passed through a metallic tubular recuperator before finally let off to a self-supporting steel chimney of sufficient height. A set of instrument will be used for smooth operation of the furnace. Bar and Round mill A cross country type mill has been envisaged for the plant. The stands have been grouped into roughing, intermediate and finishing groups. Roughing group will have 4 (four) stands, intermediate group will have 8 (eight) stands and finishing mill will have 8 (eight) stands. Roughing group of stands will be driven by one motor. 4 nos. of intermediate stands will be driven by two motors and balance 4 nos. will be driven by a separate motor. Each stand of finishing group will be driven by single motor. Necessary guides and troughs will be provided at entry and exit of mill stands. One wire rod outlet has been provided in the mill. The wire rod line will have 4 stand blocks driven by a single motor through gear box. Coil forming and handling of coil is provided. Automated tilting, drop type tilter and feeding arrangement will be provided in roughing group of stands. Repeaters have been provided in roughing / intermediate stands as necessary. Design provision has been made for introduction of slit rolling facility in future to roll 8 mm, 10 mm & 12 mm rebars in two strands. The rebars discharged from the mill will pass through a water cooling system comprising cooling pipes with high pressure water nozzles for rapid water quenching. At the cooling pipes the bar skin temperature will be reduced to about 600oC. The core of the bar still remains hot. This entrapped heat tempers the bar. This thermo-mechanical treatment of the bars increases tensile strength without adversely effecting weldability and elongation properties. This process eliminates requirement of cold twisting of bars for production of rebars. A dividing shear, to cut the products to cooling bed length, will be located immediately after the water cooling system. This shear will divide all products to cooling bed lengths. Rake type cooling beds have been envisaged to receive the rolled product. Cooling bed will

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 26

 POWER GENERATION (WHRB & AFBC) It is proposed to install WHRB & AFBC based power plant in the proposed expansion project to meet the power requirement of steel plant. WHRB (Waste Heat Recovery Boiler) Waste Heat Recovery Boilers will be installed to the DRI kilns. 2 x 10 TPH Boilers will be installed for 2 x 100 TPD existing DRI Kiln. 1 x 22 TPH Boiler will be installed for the 200 TPD DRI Kilns. 8 MW electricity will be generated. The waste gases from the DRI kilns will pass through WHRB. The flue gases after Post Combustion Chamber (PCC) will be taken to unifired furnace chamber and then flow over banks of super heater, convective evaporator and economizer before being discharged to atmosphere through ESP, ID fan and stack. After heat recovery in WHRB, the flue gases will be treated in a high efficiency ESP to bring down the particulate matter in the gases to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and discharged through 70 m tall stack. AFBC (Atmospheric Fluidized Bed Combustion) 1x30 TPH AFBC boiler will be installed to generate 7MW electricity. Mixed fuel, comprising of mix of dolochar and imported coal will be used in the AFBC boiler. Fly ash and bed ash will be collected in dry form in silos and utilized as per MOEF&CC rule for cement making and brick making. MOU has been done with cement plan and brick plants. High efficiency ESP will be provided to bring down the particulate matter to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and discharged through 70 m tall stack. In order to control SO2 o 100 mg/Nm3, FGD will be installed. NOx will be controlled using Extra Low NOx burners to 100 mg/Nm3. Mercury will be controlled to 0.03 mg/Nm3 by wet scrubbing (FGD) and by choice of coal having low mercury content.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 27

2.8 PROJECT DESCRIPTION (SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATIONS OF THE FEASIBILITY DRAWINGS WHICH GIVE INFORMATION IMPORTANT FOR EIA PURPOSE). Project Description: The production of TMT Bars and Wire Rods will be done by adopting the conventional steel making route, shown in following Figure :-

Figure 2.10 Complete Flow Diagram 2.9 DESCRIPTION OF MITIGATION MEASURES INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO MEET ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS, ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING CONDITIONS, OR OTHER EIA REQUIREMENTS. 2.9.1 Air Emission Control The following are the Air Emission Control systems proposed: Table 2:21 Proposed Air Emission Control Systems SL.No Source Control Equipment Maximum Particulate Emission At The Outlet 1 DRI kilns with Electro Static Precipitators <30 mg/Nm3 WHRB’s (ESPs) 2 Raw Material Bag Filters -- Handling 3 Cooler discharge Bag Filter -- 4 Product Separation Bag Filter -- 5 Induction Furnaces Fume Extraction system with <30 mg/Nm3 with CCM bag filters 5 Rolling Mill Direct charging Stack height Alternate fuel- Gas (CBM) 6 AFBC Boiler Electro Static Precipitator <30 mg/Nm3 (ESP) 7 Coal Mill Bag Filter <30 mg/Nm3

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 28

8 Internal Roads and Asphalted. -- shop floors Industrial vacuum cleaners will be provided for regular sweeping of roads. 9 Conveyors Covered with tin sheets and -- bag filters provided at transfer points 10 Raw Material Coal- Covered shed -- Storage Area Other raw materials: stock piles covered with tarpaulin Measures to control fugitive dust emissions The fugitive dust (PM) emissions occur from road, raw material unloading and loading, vehicle movement leading the resuspension of settled dust, etc. Following mitigation measures are recommended for its control:

 Apply water to suppress dust generation namely use of Anti-smog guns, Water canons, Water sprinklers and Hydrant and hoses connected to water reservoir/tank  Use of dust suppressants namely liquid polymer emulsion, agglomeration chemicals (lignosulphonates, polyacrylamides), cementitious products like lime and calcium sulphate, Petroleum based emulsions, Chloride salts (Mg and Ca)  Use of scaffolding sheets /nets, wind fencing for dust control  Stabilised concreted earthworks with stone, soil, geotextiles, vegetation, compacting.  Use enclosures – covering for stockpiles – tarpaulin, plastic, fences, screens  Keep proper shape of stockpiles (avoid steep slopes and faces)  Remove muck from truck tyres an under bodies prior to leaving the plant premises  Minimize the drop height of raw materials  All road surfaces for permanent movement of trucks shall be paved (Concreted)  Apply water spray in conjunction with cutting, grinding, drilling  Provide enclosure around mixing process  Use mechanical road sweeping machine for regular cleaning of roads  Use industrial vacuum cleaner for cleaning all shop floors and roofs.  Monitoring of fugitive dust emissions (at 20 upwind and downwind direction using HVS)

2.9.2 Waste Water Generation, Treatment. Waste Water & Management  DRI Plant, SMS and Rolling Mill do not require any water for the manufacturing process. Water is required only for cooling purpose.  There is no wastewater discharge from the DRI Plant, as closed circuit cooling system will be followed.  There is no wastewater discharge from the Induction Furnace, as closed circuit cooling system will be followed.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 29

 Blow down of cooling towers will be taken to tank and reused for dust suppression in raw material unloading yard  There is no wastewater discharge from the Rolling Mill, as the contact cooling water will be recycled via descaling tanks.  Effluent generated from power plant (boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration, cooling tower blow down and plant washings) will be treated in ETP and utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning.  Sanitary wastewater will be treated in STP and treated water will be used for greenbelt development.  Storm water drains will be made along the plant boundary. Sedimentation pits will be provided along the storm water drains. The runoff will be discharged to municipal sewer.  Garland drains will be provided along the raw material stock yard. The water will be collected in sedimentation tank, treated and then reused for dust suppression. The following will be treated combined effluent characteristics of ETP:- Table 2:22 ETP effluent Characteristics Parameters Inlet characteristics Outlet characteristics pH 6.5 - 8.5 6.5 - 8.5 TSS 50 - 200mg/l < 100 mg/l Oil & Grease 10 - 35mg/l < 10 mg/l BOD 10-125 < 30 COD 20-250 <250 Iron 1.0 - 6mg/l < 1.0 mg/l Chromium 0.2 – 0.5 mg/l < 0.2 mg/l Phosphates 5.0 – 15 mg/l < 5.0 mg/l 2.9.3 Solid Waste Generation & Management The following will be the solid waste generation from the existing plant, proposed expansion project and method of disposal.

Table 2:23 Industrial Waste Management S.No Name Quantity, Utilization 1 DRI Char 36,000 100% In power generation Ash/Dust from In civil construction purpose and Will be given 2 15,000 DRI to Brick manufacturers. 3 Kiln Accretion Slag 600 Will be utilized in road construction Slag from SMS will be crushed and iron will be recovered & remaining non-magnetic material will be inert nature and will be used as sub base 4 SMS slag 24,000 material in road construction/ used for brick manufacturing/ civil construction works like PCC and wall construction. Mill scales Will be given to Ferro alloy 5 15,00 from Rolling Mill manufacturing units and used in IF.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 30

6 End Cutting 3,420 Will be recycled to SMS unit Ash will be collected in dry form and stored in 7 Ash from CPP 22,600 silos. From silos it will be given to cement plants / brick manufacturers. MOU has been done. Hazardous waste generation, storage & disposal Waste Oil: 1.0 KL / Annum This will be stored in covered HDPE drums in a designated area and will be given to WBPCB approved vendors. Table 2:24 Municipal Solid Waste Generation & Its Disposal Type of Municipal Solid Waste Proposed Method of Disposal Construction debris (generated : Used for landfill within the plant site to the during construction phase) extent possible and recyclables will be given to authorized recyclers. Canteen waste (90 Kg/day) :  Used in composting/Vermiculture.  Used as manure for greenbelt development within the premises. Recyclables : Given to SPCB authorized dealers.

 The lead acid battery or dry battery will be given to authorized recycler having authorization from competent authority;  E-waste generated from the plant will be given to authorized recycler having authorization from competent authority; 2.10 ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY FOR THE RISK OF TECHNOLOGICAL FAILURE. Manufacturing technologies for all the units proposed in the expansion project are well proven technologies all over the world. Hence, there will not be any risk of technological failures from this plant.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 31

CHAPTER-3 : DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

3.1 GENERAL The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies within the probable impact zone for various components of the environment viz. Air, Noise, Water, Soil, Ecology and Bio diversity and Socio-economy. The baseline environmental study has been conducted for the study region within 10 km radius. An exhaustive attempt has been made in the current chapter to disclose all possible baseline status of environmental quality in the study area, which further serves as the basis for identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts. Villages covered within study region are shown in the Figure: 3.1 3.2 BASELINE STUDY AREA AND PERIOD Baseline environmental study has been done for the period 17thDec, 2019 to 16th March, 2020 by M/s. Envirocheck, (63/B, Rastraguru Avenue, Kolkata. Accredited by NABL, JSPCB & WBPCB also Recognized by MoEF&CC) in accordance with the Guidelines of Ministry of Environment Forests and Climate Change, Govt. of India and CPCB. Copy of Accredited certificates along with reports are enclosed as Annexure-III. One month additional data generation for Air, Ground Water, Surface Water, Noise and Soil has been done to validate the previous data during 1st Oct 2020 to 31st Oct 2020 by M/s GRC India Training & Analytical Laboratory (Accredited by NABL and Recognized by MoEFCC,). Copy of Accredited certificates are enclosed as Annexure-IV. Study area map are shown in the Figure 3.1.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd. Page 32

Figure 3.1 Study Area Map

Table 3:1 Frequency of Environmental Monitoring Sampling Attributes Locations Parameters Frequency A. Air Environment Hourly avg data was generated -17th Dec, 2019 to 16th March, Temperature, Micro- 2020 (winter). Relative Humidity, Meteorological At Project Site Additional one month Wind direction, Data data was generated Wind Speed from 1st Oct 2020 to 31st Oct 2020 (for validation) Hourly avg data was PM10, PM2.5, SO2, generated -17th Dec, NOx, CO. 2019 to 16th March, 8 locations in the Benzene, BAP, NH , 2020 (winter). Ambient Air 3 study area of 10 km O , As, Ni and Pb Additional one month Quality 3 radius. was generated at data was generated one location (Project from 1st Oct 2020 to Site) 31st Oct 2020 (for validation) 8 numbers of locations Once in Study Period Noise Levels in B. Noise in the study area of 10 (1st Oct 2020 to 31st dB(A) km radius Oct 2020)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 33

Samples from 4 Physical, Chemical Once in Study Period. numbers of locations C. Soil Quality Characteristics, Soil (1st Oct 2020 to 31st within 10 km radius Texture Oct 2020) from the project site. D. Water Samples from 8 Physical, Chemical, Once in Study Period. Ground numbers of locations Microbiological and (1st Oct 2020 to 31st Water within 10 km radius Heavy Metal Oct 2020) from the project site. Samples from 8 Physical, Chemical, Once in Study Period. Surface numbers of locations Microbiological and (1st Oct 2020 to 31st Water within 10 km radius Heavy Metal Oct 2020) from the project site. 3.3 ESTABLISHMENT OF BASELINE FOR VALUED ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS, AS IDENTIFIED IN THE SCOPE. 3.3.1 Micrometeorology The study of micro meteorological data helps to understand the variations in the ambient air quality status in that region. The prevailing micrometeorological condition at project site plays a crucial role in transport and dispersion of air pollutants. The persistence of the predominant wind direction and wind speed at the project site decide the direction and extent of the air pollution impact zone. Micrometeorological data were collected by using the wind monitor as per IMD guideline which was installed near project site. 3.3.1.1 Source of Meteorological Data All the micrometeorological data were collected on hourly basis. Meteorological conditions of the study area are presented in Table 3.2. 3.3.1.2 Temperature During the study period minimum temperature was recorded 8.4OC and maximum temperature was recorded as 37.9 OC. Temperature data were collected on hourly basis during the study period. 3.3.1.3 Humidity Humidity affects the nature and characteristics of pollutants in the atmosphere as it is the measure of amount of moisture in the atmosphere. During the study period minimum Humidity was recorded 19.80% and maximum Humidity was recorded as 98%. The variation in humidity is represented graphically in Figure 3.3. Table 3:2 Weather summary during study period 1 Average Wind Speed : 0.92 m/s 2 Minimum Temperature : 8.4 0C 3 Maximum Temperature : 37.9 0C 4 Mean Temperature : 20.42 0C 5 Minimum Humidity : 19.8 6 Maximum Humidity : 98

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 34

7 Mean Humidity : 57.27

8 Total Rainfall : 432.5 mm 3.3.1.4 Wind speed and wind direction Hourly wind speed data were collected for the period 17th Dec 2019 and 16th March 2020 with the help of wind monitor. The rate of dispersion, diffusion and transportation of pollutants in the atmosphere mainly depend on wind speed and its direction. Wind direction and velocity data have been collected during the study period. Dominant wind direction in the study period was from NE - SW during the study period. Average Wind Speed during study period is 0.92 m/s. 3.3.1.5 Windrose Wind rose diagram is a graphical representation of the magnitude and direction of wind speed considering all the directions. From the knowledge of wind rose one can easily predict the direction and extent of spreading of the gaseous and particulate matter from the source. Wind rose diagram has been prepared by using hourly wind velocity and dominant wind direction data and is presented in Figure 3.2

Figure 3.2 Wind Rose Diagram of 1st October 2020 to 31st October 2020 3.3.1.6 Interpretation of Micrometeorological Data During the study, wind blow was in the direction of NE-SW and wind speed range 0.2 to 19.0 km/h. Based on the wind direction and wind speed it is interpreted that maximum dispersion of air pollutant will be in SW direction during the period of Oct 2020. 3.4 AIR ENVIRONMENT 3.4.1 Selection of Sampling Locations Following points were considered during the selection of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring locations.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 35

 Predominant wind direction

 Upwind direction  Topography of the study area,  Densely populated areas,  Location of surrounding Industries,  Facility for Ambient Air Monitoring,  Avoidance of proximity of roads

Figure 3.3 Map Showing the Study Region with Locations for Ambient Air

Ambient Air Quality monitoring locations are presented in Figure 3.3 and Table 3.3.

Table 3:3 Ambient Air Sampling Stations Code Distance/ Environmental setting wrt emissions Locations No. Direction from project In order to see the baseline conditions AAQ-1 Project Site Centre of project site, which is inside the Mangalpur industrial area Upwind direction (many brick kilns are AAQ-2 Village- Topsi 5.5 km/N operating around this location) Near Christin Downwind direction, densely AAQ-3 Primary School- 3.0 km/WSW populated area Raniganj AAQ-4 Vill- Bahula 5.5 km/NE Upwind direction

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 36

AAQ -5 Vill-Andal 5.0 km/ESE Crosswind Crosswind direction, located close to AAQ-6 Near Nabinagar 2.0 km/West project site Vill- Chak Downwind direction, represents MGLC AAQ-7 1.0 km/SW Brindabanpur location Downwind direction, represents AAQ-8 Vill- Tarapur 6.7 km/SSW moderately impacted area

3.4.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Sampling and analysis were carried out for the parameters PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2, CO were monitored at all 8 locations. O3, NH3, Benzene, Benzo (a) pyrene, As, Ni, Pb were monitored at Project site. After the completion of sampling, samples were brought to the laboratory in Ice box and filter box for analysis. Frequency of sampling was twice a week. CPCB approved method was followed for sampling and analysis. The environmental settings around 500m distance of the monitoring location is shown in following eight google images.

AAQ-1 (Project Site) [Showing Environmental Setting within 500 m area)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 37

AAQ-2 Village- Topsi [Showing Environmental Setting within 500 m area)

AAQ-3 Raniganj [Showing Environmental Setting within 500 m area)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 38

AAQ-4 Vill- Bahula [Showing Environmental Setting within 500 m area)

AAQ-5 Village-Andal [Showing Environmental Setting within 500 m area)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 39

AAQ-6 Near Nabhinagar [Showing Environmental Setting within 500 m area)

AAQ-7 Vill- Chak Brindabanpur [Showing Environmental Setting within 500 m area)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 40

AAQ-8 Vill- Tarapur [Showing Environmental Setting within 500 m area) 3.4.3 Air Quality of Study Area Air quality at the project site ambient air quality analysis was conducted at the project site by weekly for three months. The analysis results are appended below in the Table-3.4 Table 3:4 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Concentrations in the Study Area (Oct-2021)

PM2.5 PM10 SO2 NO2 CO Parameters (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) AAQM Norms 60 100 80 80 4,000 Project Site (Mangalpur Industrial Estate) Min 45.6 78.3 10.6 23.1 760.0 Max 49.0 86.0 12.9 30.0 850.0 Average 47.8 83.3 11.6 26.4 807.5 98 Percentile 49.0 86.0 12.9 29.9 850.0 Village –Topsi Min 38.9 64.7 6.7 15.4 350 Max 47.4 82.3 9.8 26.9 592 Average 43.9 75.2 7.8 20.5 434 98 Percentile 47.3 82.0 9.6 26.4 574 Village –Near Christin Primary School, Raniganj Min 41.7 74.7 8.8 19.7 490

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 41

Max 48.5 85.3 12.5 29.1 670 Average 45.4 80.3 10.6 24.4 561 98 Percentile 48.2 84.9 12.5 29.0 662 Village – Bahula Min 39.4 65.4 6.7 15.4 250 Max 46.2 81.4 9.2 26.1 360 Average 42.8 74.9 7.8 18.3 317 98 Percentile 46.2 81.1 9.1 25.2 359 Village –Andal Min 38.8 65.4 6.5 15.7 380 Max 46.1 78.3 9.3 19.4 430 Average 41.5 73.6 7.8 17.8 403 98 Percentile 45.6 78.2 9.2 19.3 429 Village –Nabinagar Min 41.5 80.9 9.2 17.8 480 Max 48.7 85.7 12.7 29.2 560 Average 46.7 83.1 11.4 24.0 526 98 Percentile 48.7 85.5 12.7 29.1 558.6 Village –Village Chak Brindabanpur Min 40.3 74.3 9.8 21.8 580 Max 48.6 85.3 12.3 28.7 710 Average 45.5 81.2 11.1 26.1 657.5 98 Percentile 48.5 85.3 12.3 28.7 707.2 Village – Tarapur Min 39.1 66.1 6.9 15.8 410 Max 47.1 83.5 11.4 23.5 530 Average 43.4 75.5 9.0 18.5 480 98 Percentile 47.0 83.3 11.2 22.9 529

Consultant-M/s GRC India Private Limited Page 42

3.4.4 Summary of Ambient Air Quality  Results were compared with the standard for ambient air quality monitoring as per the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC).

 During the study PM2.5 was observed in the range of 38.8 – 49.0 µg/m3. Maximum

concentration of PM2.5 was found at Mangalpur industrial estate.

 PM10 was observed in the range of 64.7 – 86 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of PM10 was found at Mangalpur industrial estate.

 SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 6.5 to 12.9 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit.

120

100 PM10

80 Max 60 Min 98 percentile 40 Limit 20

0 AAQ1 AAQ2 AAQ3 AAQ4 AAQ5 AAQ6 AAQ7 AAQ8

Figure 3.4 PM10 Concentration in µg/m3

70 60 PM2.5 50 Max 40 Min 30 98 percentile 20 Limit 10

0 AAQ1 AAQ2 AAQ3 AAQ4 AAQ5 AAQ6 AAQ7 AAQ8

Figure 3.5 PM2.5 Concentration in µg/m3

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 43

90 80 70 NO2 60 Max 50 Min 40 98 percentile 30 Limit 20 10 0 AAQ1 AAQ2 AAQ3 AAQ4 AAQ5 AAQ6 AAQ7 AAQ8

3 Figure 3.6 NO2 Concentration in µg/m

80 70 SO2 60 Max 50

40 Min

98 percentile 30 20 Limit 10

0 AAQ1 AAQ2 AAQ3 AAQ4 AAQ5 AAQ6 AAQ7 AAQ8

Figure 3.7 SO2 Concentration in µg/m3

3.4.5 Interpretation of Ambient Air Quality Data On the basis of above results, all the ambient air quality parameters have been found within the standard prescribed limits as per NAAQS standard, 2009. At the end of conclusion, the ambient air quality of monitored locations including the Project site, itself is not an air pollutant sources; however, the traffic induced by the operation of the project or local activities may cause additional air quality impact on sensitive receptors. The emission sources during the initial phase of the project would be the emissions from various sources. PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NO2 are the key criteria pollutants for assessment of the air quality impact on this project. Carbon monoxide is one of the primary pollutants emitted by the road transport. However monitoring results of all monitoring stations show that background CO concentration are constantly below the respective criteria. This interpretation relate to the results recorded for monitored locations and monitoring study period.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 44

All the results of ambient air quality parameters have been found within NAAQS. PM10 and

PM2.5 value is higher in Mangalpur industrial are due to industrial activity. Comparison of Data (2020 & 2021) is given below:- Table 3:5 Comparison Data (2020 & 2021) S.No Parameters Range during Winter season Rage during Post-Monsoon 24-h average, ug/m3 season 24-h average, ug/m3 Parameter Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 1 PM10 68.10 95.10 64.7 86 2 PM2.5 41.50 56.90 38.8 49 3 SO2 <4.0 10.50 6.5 12.9 4 NO2 16.50 36.50 15.4 30 5 CO <0.1 mg/m3 0.5 mg/m3 250 850 3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT Background noise levels were measured using integrated sound level meter in 08 locations.

Table 3:6: Noise Monitoring Locations Were Located Within the Study Area Distance/ Code No. Locations Selection Criteria Direction NQ-1 Project Site-North boundary -- Plant boundary

NQ-2 Project Site-East boundary -- Plant boundary

NQ-3 Project Site-South boundary -- Plant boundary

NQ-4 Project Site-West boundary -- Plant boundary

NQ-5 SKS School, Mangalpur 0.8 km West Silence Area

NQ-6 Village-Baktarnagar 0.8 km East Residential Area

NQ-7 Village-Chak Brindabanpur 1 km SW Residential Area

NH2 near Mangalpur Industrial NQ-8 0.4 km N Industrial Area Estate

Table 3:7 Noise Levels in Study Area Ambient Noise Level Leq Station Station location dB(A) code Day Night NQ-1 Project Site (North Side Boundary) 66.1 60.7 NQ-2 Project Site (East Side Boundary) 62.9 60.8 NQ-3 Project Site (South Side Boundary) 60.0 58.4 NQ-4 Project Site (West Side Boundary) 69.6 62.3 NQ-5 SKS School ,Mangalpur 49.3 42.0 NQ-6 Village-Baktarnagar 52.9 43.3 NQ-7 Village- Chak Brindabanpur 53.4 44.2 Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 45

NH-2 side - Near Mangalpur Industrial 73.0 68.9 NQ-8 Area Noise standards have been designated for different types of land use i.e. residential, commercial, industrial areas and silence zones, as per ‘The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000, Notified by Ministry of Environment and Forests, New Delhi, February 14, 2000. Different standards have been stipulated for day (6 AM to 10 PM) and night (10 PM to 6 AM). 3.5.1 Observations The values of noise observed in the residential areas are primarily owing to vehicular traffic. The baseline noise levels have been monitored at different locations as indicated in the Table 3.7 and graphical representation is given in Figure: 3.8. The noise level study shows that the noise levels are meeting the acceptable norms. The noise levels in the industrial area varies from 68.9 to 73 dBA. At plant boundary it varies from 69.6 to 58.4 dBA. The noise levels in the residential area varies from 44.2 to 53.4 dBA. At SKS school the day time noise level max is 49.3 dBA, which is within the standard of 50 dBA. 80 70 60 50 40 Day 30 Night 20 10 0 NQM1 NQM2 NQM3 NQM4 NQM5 NQM6 NQM7 NQM8 Ambient Noise Level Monitoring

Figure 3.8 The Graphical Representation of Noise Level Survey

3.5.2 Interpretation of Noise Data Noise standards have been designated for different types of Noise emitting sources i.e. residential, commercial, industrial areas and silence zones, as per ‘The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000, Notified by Ministry of Environment and Forests, New Delhi. Based on noise monitoring data collected from the monitoring locations including project site, it is interpreted that ambient noise quality of studied locations is well within the permissible limits and no noise pollution seems during the monitoring period. The noise level is maximum at one monitoring location i.e. National Highway-2, due to the vehicular movement at that particular area.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 46

3.6 WATER ENVIRONMENT 3.6.1 Reconnaissance Survey The impact has been assessed on randomly selected surface and ground water sources falling within the impact zone. In order to assess the existing water quality, the water samples were collected from ten different locations within the study area and analyzed as per the procedure specified in standard methods for examination of water and wastewater published by American Public Health Association and Bureau of Indian Standards (APHA/BIS). Selected water quality parameters for water resources of the study area have been used for describing the water environment and assessing the impacts on it. To assess the water quality impacts, water resources in the impact area have been grouped into 2 classes.  Ground water resources in the deeper strata of the ground  Surface water resources 3.6.2 Sampling and Analysis All the water samples were collected and analyzed as per “Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater”, APHA 22nd edition, 2012. Water Samples for the analysis of physico-chemical parameters were collected in plastic carboy and parameter wise preserved onsite as per the technique defined in the book of APHA, 22nd edition, 2012. Temperature, pH and DO were analyzed onsite and samples were brought to the laboratory for the analysis of remaining parameters. 3.6.3 Ground Water and Surface Water Resources 8 ground water and 8 surface water samples were collected from the study area to assess the water quality during the study period. The ground water samples were drawn from the hand pumps and open wells being used by the villagers for their domestic needs and surface water from the water bodies within project site. The details of the locations are given in Table 3.8. Table 3:8 Water Sampling Locations (Ground & Surface Water) W.R.T. Site Remarks Code Name of the Station Direction Distance in Km GW-1 Mangalpur Industrial Estate Approx. 1km-NNE GW-2 Tubewell Near Raniganj Approx.1km-WNW GW-3 Tubewell Near Vill-Nabinagar Approx. 2 km-West GW-4 Tubewell Near Vill-Chak Brindabanpur Approx.1 km-SW GW-5 Tubewell Near Vill-Bahula Approx.6.50 km-NE GW-6 Tubewell Near Vill-Andal Approx.5 km-ESE GW-7 Tubewell Near Ballavpur Approx.4 km-SW GW-8 Tubewell Near Topsi Village Approx.5.50 km-North Damodar River 60 m upstream of confluence Approx4 km-South SW-1 of ADDA Municipality drain

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 47

W.R.T. Site Remarks Code Name of the Station Direction Distance in Km Damodar River 60 m downstream of Approx.4 km-SSE SW-2 confluence of ADDA Municipality drain SW-3 Damodar River upstream of Raniganj 6 km SW (NH 60 road bridge) 4 km SE (near Andal Railway SW-4 Damodar River downstream of Andal station) SW-5 Raja Baandh Pond at Village Nabinagar Approx.1.5 km-West SW-6 Pond at Village Baktarnagar Approx.1.5-SSE SW-7 Pond at Village Dhandadhi Approx.2.50 km-NE SW-8 Pond at Village Lachhipur Approx.1.50 km-ESE

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 48

Figure 3.9 Ground Water Quality Monitoring Locations

Figure 3.10 Surface Water Quality Monitoring Locations

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 49

Table 3:9: Ground Water Analysis Result (Oct - 2020)

Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd. (Expansion of Sponge Iron Unit), Mangalpur Industrial Estate, Ranigunj, Distt. West Burdwan, West Bengal Ground Water Quality (October-2020) S.No Parameter Unit Limit (as per GW 1 GW 2 GW 3 GW 4 GW 5 GW 6 GW 7 GW 8 Desirabl Permissible Tubewell Tubewell Tubewell Near Tubewell Tubewell Near Tubewell Tubewell Tubewell e Limit Limit Mangalpur Near Village Near Village Bahula Near Near Village Near Industrial Raniganj Nabinagar Village Village Ballavpur Village 1 Colour Hazen 5 15 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 2 Turbidity NTU 1 5 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 3 pH - 6.5-8.5 No Relaxation 6.48 7.02 6.98 7.08 7.25 6.86 7.11 7.05 4 Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l 200 600 250 280 240 260 298 300 265 258 5 Iron (as Fe) mg/l 1 No Relaxation 0.71 0.33 0.29 0.35 0.31 0.39 0.45 0.34 6 Chlorides (as Cl) mg/l 250 1000 140 125 145 140 126 140 135 142 7 Fluoride (as F ) mg/l 1 1.5 0.82 0.45 0.49 0.52 0.35 0.45 0.26 0.36 8 TDS mg/l 500 2000 640 645 707 709 675 700 705 670 9 Calcium(as Ca2+) mg/l 75 200 60 53 58 62 72 67 64 60 10 Magnesium (as Mg2+) mg/l 30 100 24 21 23 25 28 27 25 24 11 Copper (as Cu) mg/l 0.05 1.5 0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 12 Manganese(as Mn) mg/l 0.1 0.3 0.07 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 13 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 200 400 100 115 120 118 115 122 115 111 14 Nitrate(as NO3) mg/l 45 No Relaxation 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.1 2.9 3.4 3.3 2.9 15 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l 0.001 No Relaxation <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 16 Nickel (as Ni) mg/l 0.02 No Relaxation 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 17 Selenium ( as Se ) mg/l 0.01 No Relaxation <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 18 Arsenic (as As) mg/l 0.01 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 19 Lead (as Pb) mg/l 0.01 No Relaxation <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 20 Zinc (as Zn) mg/l 5 15 0.78 0.34 0.25 0.34 0.25 0.29 0.15 0.25 21 Chromium (as Cr6+) mg/l 0.05 No Relaxation <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 22 Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/l 200 600 178 181 198 210 205 195 220 183 23 Aluminium (as Al) mg/l 0.03 0.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 24 Boron (as B) mg/l 0.5 1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 25 Odour - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 26 Taste - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 27 Phenolic Compounds (as C6H5OH)mg/l 0.001 0.002 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 28 Cyanide (as CN ) mg/l 0.05 No Relaxation <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 29 Anionic Detergent (as MBAS) mg/l 0.2 1 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 Microbiological Parameter 1 Total Coliform MPN/100mlShall not be detectable ND (<2) ND (<2) ND (<2) ND (<2) ND (<2) ND (<2) ND (<2) ND (<2) Absent Absent Absent 2 E.coli E.coli /100mlShall not be detectable Absent (<2) (<2) Absent (<2) (<2) Absent (<2) (<2) Absent (<2) Absent (<2)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 50

Table 3:10 Surface water Analysis (Oct- 2020) Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd. (Expansion of Sponge Iron Unit), Mangalpur Industrial Estate, Ranigunj, Distt. West Burdwan, West Bengal SURFACE WATER QUALITY STUDY (October 2020) S.W. 1 S.W. 2 S.W. 3 S.W. 4 S.W. 5 S.W. 6 S.W. 7 S.W. 8 Damodar River - Damodar River - 60m Downstream Damodar River Damodar River Raja Baandh Pond at S.No. Parameter Unit 60m upstream of Pond at Village Pond at Village of confluence of Upstram of Downstram of Pond at Village Village confluence of ADDA Baktarnagar Lachhipur ADDA Muncipality Raniganj Andal Nabinagar Dhandadhi Muncipality Drain Drain 1 pH - 7.35 7.89 7.52 7.22 7.65 7.38 7.86 7.19 2 Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 4.4 3.1 5.2 4.5 4.9 5.3 5.7 6.6 3 BOD (3 Days at 27 °C) mg/l 6.7 7.0 4.4 6.1 5.7 4.1 3.2 3.0 4 Free Ammonia (as N) mg/l 0.3 1.7 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.1 5 Boron mg/l 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.2 6 Conductivity µmhos/cm 417 562 454 543 601 592 583 607 7 Temperature 0C 23.5 23.8 22.9 23.4 23.8 24.5 22.4 24.8 8 Turbidity NTU 16 35 12 18 10 8 14 6 9 Magnesium hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l 35 42 38.0 41 52 58 51 53 10 Total Alkalinity (as CaCO3) mg/l 157 179 154 168 170 178 174 172 11 Chloride (as Cl) mg/l 28 46 29 32 39 48 51 47 12 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 33 59 35 38 65 73 69 71 13 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 2.5 5.4 2.8 3.0 4.5 5.7 4.8 5.2 14 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8 0.9 15 Sodium (as Na) mg/l 16.0 19.0 17.0 18.0 24.0 27.0 23.0 24.0 16 Potassium (as K) mg/l 7.6 12.6 7.8 8.1 10.5 11.6 10.8 10.7 17 TKN (as N) mg/l 3.9 8.8 4.3 5.7 7.8 8.4 8.1 8.8 18 Total Phosphorous (as P) mg/l 3.5 5.9 3.4 4.1 6.5 7.4 6.5 6.8 19 COD mg/l 43 55 40 52 41 36 30 27 20 Lead (as Pb) mg/l 0.03 0.2 0.01 0.02 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 21 Iron (as Fe) mg/l 0.19 0.38 0.12 0.15 0.42 0.51 0.53 0.45 22 Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 23 Zinc (as Zn) mg/l 0.3 0.8 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.5 24 Arsenic (as As) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 25 Mercury (as Hg) mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 26 Chromium (as Cr) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 27 Nickel (as Ni) mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 28 TDS mg/l 278 375 303 362 401 395 389 405 29 Sodium Adsorption Ratio - 0.38 0.42 0.34 0.37 0.36 0.40 0.34 0.40 30 Phenolic compounds (as C6H5OH) mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 Bacteriological Parameters 1 Total Coliform MPN/100ml 530 710 410 520 480 390 360 340 2 Faecal Coliform MPN/100ml 75 90 39 60 47 31 27 19

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 51

3.6.4 Summary of Ground Water Quality The test results were compared with the Drinking Water Specification: IS: 10500, 1992 (Reaffirmed 2012). Summarized as under.  pH was observed in the range of 6.48 – 7.25 which meets with desirable norms.  Total dissolved solid were recorded in the range of 640 to 709 mg/L with minimum at Tube well water in industrial area and maximum at Tubewell water near Chak- Brindabanpur.  Total hardness was in the range of 240-300 mg/L with minimum at Tube well water near nabinagar & maximum at Tube well water Near Andal village.  Total Alkalinity was found in the range of 178-220 mg/L with minimum at Tube well in Mangalpur industrial area & maximum at Tube well water Near Ballavpur.  Iron was found in the range of 0.29-0.0.71 mg/L with maximum at Tube well water near Mangalpur industrial area and minimum at Tube well water near nabinagar.  As microbiological parameters MPN analysis was also carried out and it was found Nil. 3.6.5 Interpretation of Ground Water Quality Data On the basis of test results, it is conclude that results of all sampling locations met with the desirable limits of Drinking water standard. pH, hardness, alkalinity, chlorides, sulfates and total dissolve solids are below the desirable limits of standard. The Ionic balance computation, considering the relationship between total cations (Ca++, Mg++, Na+ and K+) and total anions (HCO3-, SO4--, Cl- and NO2---) for each set of complete analysis of water sample, is observed to be within the acceptability (+2%) limit. Ground water samples are also compared with the “Water Quality Criteria” published by CPCB, 1979. All the ground water samples are falling under the Category “A‟ (Drinking water source without conventional treatment but after disinfection). 3.6.6 Summary of Surface Water Quality The following description is based on the analysis of the samples:  During the analysis pH of the samples was found in the range of 7.19-7.89.  TDS analysis was also carried out for surface water sample and it was found in the range of 278-405 mg/L.  DO measured during analysis was found in the range of 3.1 – 6.6 mg/L.  COD measured during analysis was found in the range of 27-55 mg/L.  BOD measured during analysis was found in the range of 3.0-7.0 mg/L.  MPN test was also carried out for this surface water sample and it was found positive. It indicates towards the fecal contamination in surface water body. 3.6.7 Interpretation of Surface Water Quality Data Based on the above test results, it is interpreted that surface water quality of Damoder River does not meet the “Water Quality Standards” as per CPCB, 1972 and falling under the Category “E” (Industrial Cooling, Irrigation, controlled waste disposal) and Other surface water can be used as drinking purpose because they are meeting the “Water Quality Standards” as per CPCB,

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 52

1972 and falling under the Category “C” (Drinking water source after conventional treatment and disinfection). 3.7 SOIL ENVIRONMENT 3.7.1 Soil Sampling Locations Details of the soil sampling locations are given in below:- Table 3:11 : Soil Sampling Location Distance & Direction Code Location from Project Site SQ-1 Project Site-Mangalpur ----- SQ-2 Vill-Baktarnagar Approx 1.5 km, SSE SQ-3 Vill-Tapsi Approx 5.5 km, North SQ-4 Vill-Andal Approx 5km,ESE

Figure 3.11 Map showing the Study Region with Locations for Soil

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 53

Table 3:12 : Soil Quality Result

Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd. (Expansion of Sponge Iron Unit), Mangalpur Industrial Estate, Ranigunj, Distt. West Burdwan, West Bengal Soil Quality Data (October-2020) Project Site Village Village Village S.No Parameter Unit (Mangalpur) Baktarnagar Tapsi Andal Texture - Sandy Loam Sandy Loam Sandy LoamSandy Loam Sand % 68.9 71.2 68.1 73.8 1 Silt % 9.6 9.2 10.2 7.1 Clay % 21.5 19.6 21.7 19.1 2 pH (1:2 Suspension) - 6.71 7.18 7.21 6.95 3 Electrical Conductivity (1:2) µmhos/cm 357 332 336 353 4 Cation Exchange Capacity meq/100 gm 13.9 14.2 14.4 14.7 5 Exchangeable Potassium as K mg/kg 90 95 98 95 6 Exchangeable Sodium as Na mg/kg 56 47 49 45 7 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca mg/kg 2105 2259 2282 2326 8 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg mg/kg 346 298 299 310 9 Sodium Absorption Ratio - 0.30 0.25 0.26 0.23 10 Total Phosphorus as P mg/kg 7.4 9.2 9.7 10.4 11 Organic Matter % 2.8 3.4 3.7 3.6 12 Avaliable Nitrogen as N mg/kg 23.8 26.9 25.1 26.3 13 Iron as Fe mg/kg 610 540 537 419 14 Zinc as Zn mg/kg 24 21 18 31 15 Copper as Cu mg/kg 12.5 8.1 7.7 8.3 16 Boron as B mg/kg 4.6 3.1 2.7 3.2 17 Manganese as Mn mg/kg 410 380 360 365 18 Moisture Content % 4.8 5.2 5.7 4.6 19 Water Holding Capacity % 28.7 30.6 32.1 32.7 20 Porosity % 37.6 36.5 39.4 38.2 21 Permeability cm/hrs 1.9 2.1 1.8 2.2 22 Bulk Density gm/cc 1.31 1.28 1.29 1.31

3.7.2 Observations Soil is the media for supplying the nutrients for plant growth. Nutrients are available to plants at certain pH and pH of soils can reflect by addition of pollutants in it either by air, or by water or by solid waste or by all of these. In order to establish the baseline status of soil characteristics, soil samples were collected from 03 sampling locations. The analysis results show that soil is basic in nature as pH value ranges from 6.71 to 7.21 with Nitrogen of 23.8 to 26.9 mg/kg. The concentration of Phosphorus and Potassium has been found to be in good amount in the soil samples. Soil texture is Loamy Sandy at project site. 3.7.3 Interpretation of Soil Data Based on soil analysis data it is concluded that soils are weakly alkaline in nature at all sampling locations. The organic carbon status is moderate. The soil is rich in macronutrients and contains high potassium content. The micronutrients such as copper, zinc, boron and iron are medium and sufficient for successful plantation and green belt development. Inspite of this

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 54

the sufficient quantity of organic manure and the quantity of recommended doses of nitrogen and phosphorus should be added. 3.8 LAND USE PATTERN OF STUDY AREA Studies on land use aspects of eco system play an important role to identify sensitive issues and to take appropriate action for maintaining ecological homeostasis in the region. The main objective of this section is to provide a baseline status of the area, so that temporal changes due to the proposed project on the surroundings can be assessed in future. Data Used: United States Geological Survey (USGS) Satellite Data: Land sat 8 cloud free data has been used for Land use /Land cover analysis, Satellite Sensor–OLITIRS multi-spectral digital data has been used for the preparation of land use/ land cover map of present study. Survey of India reference map on 1:50,000 scales have been used for the preparation of base map and geometric correction of satellite data. Ground truthing has been carried out to validate the interpretation accuracy and reliability of remotely sensed data, by enabling verification of the interpreted details and by supplementing with the information, which cannot be obtained directly on satellite imagery. Methodology: The methodology used for the study consists of following components. Methodology Adopted for Thematic Data Extraction from the Satellite Imageries ARC/GIS 10.0 software were used for the project. Digital image processing techniques were applied for the mapping of the land use land cover classes of the provided area from the satellite data. Methodology used for land use classification and mapping is presented in Figure 3.12.

Figure 3.12 Methodology used for land use classification

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 55

3.8.1 Findings The spatial distribution of various land use/ land cover is given in Table 3.13 and Figure 3.13. The data base on land use/ land cover belongs to project area and 10 km radius of the project area is discussed as follows: Table 3:13: Land Use/ Land Cover Analysis S. No. Land use/ land cover Area (Ha.) Percentage (%) 1. 1. Settlement 9,109.79 28.25 2. 2. Sand 833.15 2.58 3. 3. Water Bodies/River 659.06 2.04 4. 4. Forest 3,15.51 0.98 5. 5 Industries 2,228.74 6.91 6. 6. Mining 815.77 2.53 7. 7. Open Scurb 14,516.98 45.01 8. 8. Agricultural Land 4,088.48 12.68 Total 32,567.48 100 %

Figure 3.13 Landuse Map of Study Area

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 56

Figure 3.14 DEM Map of Study Area

Figure 3.15 False Color Composite (FCC) map of study area

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 57

3.9 GEOLOGY & SOIL The regional geology of the Raniganj and surrounding area consist of an Achaean Basement Gneiss equivalent to the Chotonagpur Gneisses. The Lower Gondwana rock conformably overlies the gneisses and in turn is covered by sediments and soils. A number of major and minor faults of cross and dip slip had affected the area in Achaean times leading to the development of the Raniganj Sedimentary Basin in which coal formation took place during Gondwana times. The main boundary fault is the Damodar Fault and Panchet Fault while some of the minor faults such as trans Ajoy Fault. At present no basement rocks have been exposed in this region and the area in general covered by the weathered product of Lower Gondwana Sediments. The sediments are mainly alluvial in nature and can be divided to Gangetic Alluvium, old river and recent river alluvium. Geomorphologically the regional slope id from the West to East and all the major drainage flows in the same direction with the major River Damodar following this trend. In geological time scale, the Raniganj comes through different groups such as:-  The Lower Gondwanas which in turn consists of Talchir formation; Barakar formation; Barren Measures or Iron stone formation; Raniganj formation; and Panchet formation;  Upper Gondwanas group which include the Supra-Panchet formation only;  Post-Gondwanas that include igneous intrusive; and  Recent and Quaternary age consists superficial cover deposits mainly alluvium and lateritic soils. The present tract of Gondwanas in the Raniganj coal belt represents a small portion of Gondwana sedimentation, which has been faulted down within the Archaean period. The main complex boundary fault with Gondwana rocks deposited largely exist in the major portion of the Raniganj coal belt south of the Ajoy river. The northern boundary, one of natural deposition affected by strike or oblique-faults representing the uneven Archaean land surface in early Gondwana times, which has been complicated by a number of cross faults. The main southern boundary fault is a single unbroken displacement and a large strike fault running en echelon (the main boundary fault). South of the Damodar river, a second main boundary fault, called the Panchet hill-Jemua dislocation. On the northeastern part of the Raniganj coal belt, the large oblique strike fault of the Ajoy river, had affected the preservation of the Trans-Ajoy strip of Damuda sediments. Wide tracts of lateritic rock overlie the northeastern parts of the Raniganj and Durgapur strata. This laterite deposition is composed of numerous quartz grains, and these quartzose laterites pass into lateritic conglomerates, and lateritic gravels. Different types of lateritic deposits have been found, according to their principal lithological characters of these lateritic types and of the sandy gravel beds. These are True laterite, Quartzose laterite, Lateritic gravels and conglomerates. Some other inclusions are gritty ferruginous, sandstone, clay ironstone together with lateritic deposition occur in the Raniganj coal belt. Fossil wood is also

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 58

associated with lateritic deposits. Lateritic occurrences, mainly quartzose gravels are found in the Panchet and Raniganj beds of the north and south of the Damodar river. Large areas of the eastern and southeastern parts of the Raniganj coal belt are covered by alluvium deposits mainly of the Gangetic plain. With alluvium deposits, local deposits of gravel and calcareous material are also found along the main rivers. There are three types of alluvial deposits. These are:  Gangetic alluvium - Due to erosion the thick deposits of Gangetic alluvium were laid down to the south and east. They comprise the main areas of cultivable land in the coal belt. The alluvium includes lateritic patches from the rock of the locality;  Old river alluvium - Patches of gravel with sand present high flood level of the rivers Barakar and Damodar. Among the deposits, a hardened calcareous rock forms a ridge along the river banks; and  Recent river alluvium - The larger rivers and streams deposited fine sand on the surface of the area. The three main rivers, the Damodar, the Barakar and the Ajoy deposited the region with loose sediments which attain a very considerable thickness. The master slope of the district is from west to east and southeast with the land having the highest altitude at the extreme western corner of approx. 150 m msl to about 10m near Kalna at the eastern border of the district. Investigation on ground water has revealed the presence of sediments. By paleonological findings the age of the rocks are now fixed as Middle Triassic to Jurassic, against Miocene as thought earlier. Laterite and red soil in the western part of the district and Vindhyan and Gangetic alluvium in rest of the area observed. The district remarkably presents the entire geological succession from Archaean to recent. The western part of the district comprising the Raniganj coalfield is underlain by the Gondwana sedimentary rocks and contains valuable coal deposits. Thesedimentary framework is suggested to be mainly continental, with a marinetransgression during Oligocene-Miocene times.

Figure 3.16 Soil map of Burdwan District

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 59

3.10 HYDROGEOLOGY In and around the project area which is about 4km from the Damodar River the ground water table according to the 2014-2018 report of Central Ground Water Board study is near to the surface and varies between 0.06 to 20 mbgl and are confined to either the ground water table or in deep confined aquifer. The primary source of ground water is the rain water which is copious in this region. The main drainage pattern is somewhat dendritic in type and majority of them discharge to the main rivers. Further as the total requirement of the project will be supplied by the Asansol-Durgapur Development authority no part of surface or sub-surface water will be affect both in terms of quality and also the water table depth. Ground-water in the district occurs both under water-table condition and confined condition. Ground water in the near surface aquifers occur under water-table condition and in deep aquifers, under confined or sub- artesian condition in favorable terrain. The primary source of groundwater is rainfall, a part of which is lost as evaporation and transpiration and another part moves as surface run-off and remaining part percolates into the ground from direct rainfall or by lateral infiltration from surface water-bodies to form saturated ground-water zone.

Figure 3.17 Hydro-geological map of Burdwan District

3.11 DRAINAGE PATTERN Damodar River which is the major steam in the area running 4.0 km south of the plant site. The drainage in the study area is mainly Damodar river and its tributaries. Traditionally, Damodar basin was known to be a curse. The basin of River Damodar has a very particular shape and this controls its flood pattern. The upper catchments of Jharkhand plateau, above Durgapur, makes heavy run-off during high rainfall. The discharge moves through the river, bifurcating at

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 60

Beguahana. One branch, the lower Damodar with very small capacity, reaches the Hoogly on the west bank. Damodar enters flat alluvial plains after Dishergarh and runs eastwards uptoBarsul in Burdwan and the flow of the river becomes very sluggish at this stage. Here, Damodar receives its last tributary, the Sali from the south. Afterwards the Damodar river takes a sharp turn towards south near the village Chachai, 24 km south east of Burdwan. Within its elbow several spill channels, locally known as hanans, are found. These hanas carry surpluswater of the Damodar during monsoon months. Turning south, it has a distributary named the Kana Damodar which ultimately drains out water in the Hooghly. Traversing further south Damodar splits into important channels, the Mundeswari and the Damodar. The Damodar channel flows over the Arambagh sub division of Hooghly district and Uluberia sub-division of Howrah district to meet the Hooghly opposite Falta. At present 75% of the run off from the Damodar is carried by the Mundeswari channel through the Begor and the Mushirhanas and drains out water in the Rupnaranyan. This channel can not carry the total flood discharge of the Damodar and as a result the elbow area of the Damodar gets inundated occasionally not with standing the construction of barrage and dams over the Damodar in its upper reaches. Flood protection embankments have been constructed along the banks in the lower reaches of the Damodar, but are not sufficient to cope up with the steadily rising river bed due to silting. So, Damodar river and its tributaries maintain the drainage system of the study area. It has a number of tributaries and sub-tributaries, such as Barakar, Konar, Bokaro, Haharo, Jamunia, Ghari, Guaia, Khadia and Bhera. The secondary tributaries are Talma, Choupai, Barajuri and andBarjor.Drainage map is presented in below Figure 3.30.

Figure 3.18 Drainage Map of 10 KM buffer Area

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 61

3.12 SEISMIC STATUS The Project site is located in an area which is falling in seismic Zone III (Source: IS 1893 (Part 1):2002). Map showing the project site is given below. According to GSHAP data, the district Paschim Bardhaman of West Bengal falls in a region of moderate intensity zone.

Project Site

Figure 3.19 Seismic Zone Map of India 3.13 SOCIO-ECONOMICS OF THE STUDY AREA 3.13.1 Scope of Study  To collect baseline data of the study area  To comprehend socio-economic status of people living in the study area

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 62

 To assess likely impact of the project on social and economic life of the people in the study area  To measure the impact of the project on Quality of life of the people living in the study area.  To ensure sustainability of positive impacts  To recommend mitigation measures on adverse impacts if any.

3.13.2 Methodology and Approach The methodology adopted in the assessment of socio-economic condition in the study area is as given below:  The primary data on socioeconomic profile was collected through site observation, interviews with the key-informants and group discussions in the selected villages. Pradhan of Gram Panchayat, respondent (male-female) and school teachers were interviewed for the collection of socio-economic baseline information during the site visit by lab team.  For collection of primary data, a sample survey was conducted in the study area. In each selected habitation, a specified number of representative households were selected scientifically for collection of information through face to face interviews with head of the household or any responsible member of the family.  The secondary data includes demographic profile, and employment pattern have been sourced from Primary Census Abstract-2011 of Paschim Bardhaman and Infrastructure resource base has been extracted from District Census Handbook; Census of India, 2011.Authority. Records of the state and district administration were also referred to.  http://censusindia.gov.in/2011census/dchb/1909_PART_B_DCHB_BARDDHAMAN.p df. 3.13.3 Study Area The study area, also known as Impact Area, has been defined as sum total of core and buffer area with a radius of ten kilo metres from the periphery of the project site. All the landmarks, be it natural or manmade, falling therein has been taken into consideration while undertaking the Socio-economic Impact assessment study. The study area of the proposed expansion of the Iron &Steel Manufacturing plant is spread over in two districts namely Paschim Bardhaman and Bankura in West Bengal. There are 36 settlements in the study area of which 21 are villages and 15 Town. District and Sub-district wise distribution of habitations in the study area is provided in the Table below. Table 3:14 Sub district wise distribution of Settlements in the Study Area Sl.No District Sub-district Number of Name of Name of Towns . Settlements Villages 1 Bardhama Salanpur 1 Ramchandrapur - n) Jamuria 1 Chak Dola - Raniganj 6 Damalia ,  Banshra (CT), Nimcha  Egara (CT),  J.K. Nagar

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 63

Township (CT),  Ballavpur (CT) Andal 10 Bhadur  Andal (Gram) Dhandadihi (CT) Tamla  Dakshin Khanda (CT)  Palashban (CT)  Khandra (CT)  Kajora (CT)  Siduli (CT)  Harishpur (CT) Pandabeswa 3 Konda Bahula (CT) r Chhora (CT) Faridpur 1 Kalikapur - Durgapur Manteswar 1 Khandra - Purbasthali 1 Damodarpara - Kanksa 1 Jamban - Mangalkote 1 Sitalgram - Ausgram-11 1 Chhora - Galsi 1 Mithapur - Raina-1 1 Haripur - - 2 - Guskara (M) Raniganj(M) 2 Bankura Mejhia 4 Mejhia Nil (339) Kalikapur Ghusra Ramchandrapur Vishnupur 1 Bhara Total 36 - - Source:-Secondary Survey Table 3:15 Demographic Particulars of the Study Area Sl. No. Description Number % to respective total 1.0 Households 1.1 Total 74196 100 1.2 Rural 10536 14.2 1.3 Urban 63660 85.8 1.4 Average Household size 5 1.4.1 Household size in Rural Area 5 1.4.2 Household size in Urban Area 5 2.0 Sector wise Population 2.1 Total 357258 100 2.2 Rural 48104 13.5 2.3 Urban 309154 86.5

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 64

2.3 Overall density of Population 1136.7 (Persons per sq. Km.) 3.0 Gender wise Population 3.1 Total 357258 100 3.1 Male 186239 52.1 3.2 Female 171019 47.9 4.0 Overall Sex Ratio (Number of females per 1000 males) 4.1 Overall Sex Ratio 918 4.2 Rural 937 4.3 Urban 915 5.0 Sector wise 0-6 population 5.1 Total 41978 100 5.2 Rural 5403 12.9 5.2 Urban 36575 87.1 6.0 Gender wise 0-6 population and Sex Ratio 6.1 Total 41978 100 6.2 Male 21740 51.8 6.3 Female 20238 48.2 6.4 Sex Ratio 931 (Number of females per 1000 males) 7.0 Sector wise Schedule Caste Population 7.1 Total 102806 100 7.2 Rural 19455 18.9 7.3 Urban 83351 81.1 8.0 Gender wise Schedule Caste Population and Sex Ratio 8.1 Total 102806 100 8.2 Male 52835 51.4 8.3 Female 49971 48.6 8.4 Sex Ratio 946 (Number of females per 1000 males) 9.0 Sector wise Schedule Tribe Population 9.1 Total 15252 100 9.2 Rural 2694 17.7 9.3 Urban 12558 82.3 10.0 Gender wise Schedule Tribe Population and Sex Ratio 10.1 Total 15252 100 10.2 Male 7535 49.4 10.3 Female 7717 50.6 10.4 Sex Ratio 1024 (Number of females per 1000 males) 11.0 Sector wise Distribution of Literate People 11.1 Total 238531 100 11.2 Rural 30894 13.0 11.3 Urban 207637 87.0 12.0 Gender wise Distribution of Literate People 12.1 Total 238531 100 12.2 Male 136591 57.3 12.3 Female 101940 42.7

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 65

13.0 Literacy Rate (%) 13.1 Overall Literacy Rate 75.7 13.2 Male Literacy Rate 83.0 13.3 Female Literacy Rate 67.6 13.4 Gap in Literacy Rate 15.4 14.0 Gender wise Distribution of Workers 14.1 Total Worker 117219 100 14.2 Male 98601 84.1 14.3 Female 18618 15.9 15.0 Sector wise Distribution of Workers 15.1 Total Workers 117219 100 15.2 Rural 18238 15.6 15.3 Urban 98981 84.4 16.0 Work Participation Rate (%) 16.1 Overall Work Participation Rate 36.2 16.2 Male Work Participation Rate 59.0 16.3 Female work Participation Rate 11.4 16.4 Gap in Work Participation rate 47.6 17.0 Main Worker 17.1 Total 93979 100 17.2 Male 82496 87.8 17.3 Female 11483 12.2 18.0 Marginal Worker 18.1 Total 23240 100 18.2 Male 16105 69.3 18.3 Female 7135 30.7 19.0 Agricultural Worker 19.1 Total 16161 100 19.2 Male 11739 72.6 19.3 Female 4422 27.4 20.0 Household Industrial Workers 20.1 Total 2541 100 20.2 Male 1727 68.0 20.3 Female 814 32.0 21.0 Other Workers 21.1 Total 98517 100 21.2 Male 85640 86.9 21.3 Female 12877 13.1 Source:- Secondary Survey 3.13.4 Socio-Economic Status of people living in the Study Area. Population Composition According to 2011 Population Census the study area has a total population of 3,57,258. Of this 52.1 percent are male and the remaining 47.9 percent are female. Again, of the total population 13.5 percent is rural and the remaining 86.5 percent is urban. Further, 11.8 percent of the total population belongs to 0-6 age group. About 51.8 percent of them are male and the remaining 48.2 percent are female.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 66

Sex Ratio The overall sex ratio in the study area has been worked out to 918 females per 1,000 males, which is significantly less than the national average of 943 females per 1,000 males. In the rural area the sex ratio is 937 females per 1,000 males and in the urban area it is 915 females per 1000 males. The sex ratio of Children belonging to 0-6 age group has been worked out to 931 females per 1,000 males, which is marginally higher than the national average of 919 females per 1,000 males. Density of Population The overall density of population in the study area has been worked out to 1,136.7 persons per Sq. Kilo meter, which is higher than the figure of 1029 persons per Sq. Kilo meter for the state of West Bengal. Households There are 74196 households in the study area and the average household size is 5 persons per household. Indigenous People Indigenous Peoples are distinct social and cultural groups that share collective ancestral ties to the lands and natural resources where they live, occupy or from which they have been displaced. They are inheritors and practitioners of unique cultures and ways of life and the environment. They have retained social, cultural, economic, and political characteristics that are distinct from those of the dominant societies in which they live. In India there is no such concept of indigenous people. Adivasi is the collective term used for the Tribes of India, who are considered to be the indigenous people in India. In India, 705 ethnic groups are recognised as Scheduled Tribes, which literally means Indigenous Peoples. Santal, Oran, Munda, Bhumij, Kora, Lodha, Mahali, Bhutia, Bedia, Sabar etc are the prominent tribes in West Bengal. Social Structure In the study area, the total number of persons belonging to Scheduled Caste community is 102806 which is 28.8 percent of the total population. The gender wise distribution of schedule caste population is male 51.4 percent and female 48.6 percent, registering a sex ratio of 946 females per one thousand males. Further analysis of data reveals that in the study area, the total number of people belonging to Scheduled Tribe community is 15,252, which is 4.3 percent of the total population. The gender wise distribution of schedule tribe population in the study area is male 49.4 percent and female 50.6 percent, recording a sex ratio of 1024 females per one thousand males. Socio-economic development of poor and downtrodden scheduled caste and scheduled tribe people is a continuous process and the government, both at centre and states are constantly making efforts to improve the destiny of these people. Distribution of surplus land to the members of the above categories of people is an important step taken by the government for

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 67

their economic empowerment. The State Governments have drawn up their own list of socially and educationally backward classes and implementing various developmental schemes for them, mainly in the field of education and income generation. All the ongoing schemes are critically examined and modified periodically to cater to the needs of different groups amongst the above communities. The government in each state including West Bengal has started various schemes to improve the quality of life of the rural poor, especially for the scheduled castes and scheduled tribes by making special provisions for them. Over the decades the Scheduled caste and scheduled tribe people in the state of West Bengal are making rapid progress both in economic and social sphere. Today they are no more untouchables. The literate Schedule Caste and Scheduled tribe people are engaged in trade, commerce & industry, private & government services including police and armed forces. Literates, Literacy Rate and Gender gap in Literacy Rate All persons aged seven years and above, who can both read and write with understanding in any language are considered as literate. The total number of literate persons in the study area is 42,773, which is 80.8 percent of the total population. Of the total number of literate persons 56.6 percent are male and the remaining 43.4 percent are female. The overall literacy rate in the study area has been worked out to 82.9 percent. The gender wise distribution of literacy rate reveals that 90.2 percent of the literate persons are male and 75.1 percent are female. This creates a gender gap of 15.2 percent. Worker A worker has been defined as a person who participates in a productive activity with or without compensation, wages or profit and such participation may be physical and/or mental in nature. A worker may be a main worker or a marginal worker. The main workers are those workers who had worked for the major part of the total working period. In case the total working period is 365 days the worker must have worked for more than 183 days. The marginal workers, on the other hand are those workers who had worked for less than six months during the last 365 days. The total number of workers in the study area has been worked out to 1,17,219 which is 32.8 percent of the total population. Of the total number of workers 84.1percent are male and the remaining 15.9 percent are female. This indicates a wide gap between male and female workers. The overall work participation rate is 36.2 percent. While the work participation rate of male is 59 percent it is 11.4 percent in the case of females. This indicates a gender gap of 47.6 percent, which is exceedingly high. The main workers constitute 80.2 percent of the total work force, while marginal workers constitute only 19.8 percent of the same. Further analysis of data reveals male dominancy in both Main (87.8 percent) and Marginal (69.3) percent) work force. In this connection it is stated that women members in a household are preoccupied with household work besides taking care of their children and other members of the household. Hence, they prefer to work as a marginal worker rather as a main worker.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 68

3.13.5 Various facilities available in the study (Primary Survey) Education Facilities There are large number of schools and colleges in the study area. Most of the schools and colleges are century old and located in and around Raniganj town. Few of them are listed below: 1. Searsole Raj High School established in 1856. It has facilities for teaching from class V to class XII standard. 2. Raniganj High School. It was established in 1888. 3. Raniganj G.M. Girls’ High School established in 1946. It has facilities for teaching from class V to class XII. 4. Raniganj Marwari Sanatan Vidyalaya is a Hindi-medium boys only institution established in 1912. 5. Raniganj B.D.G. Vidyamandir established in 1959. It has facilities for teaching from class V to class XII. 6. Gyan Bharati School is a Hindi-medium coeducational institution established in 1962. 7. Raniganj Sri Durga Vidyalaya established in 1963. It has facilities for teaching from class V to class XII. 8. Raniganj Urdu High School is an Urdu-medium co-educational institution established in 1967. 9. Sishu Bharati Hindi High School, established in 1980. 10. Triveni Devi Bhalotia College, also known as Raniganj TDB College, is a coeducational Institution. It was established in 1957. It is situated in a central location of Raniganj between NH-2 and Eastern Railway. 11. Triveni Devi Bhalotia College, established in 1957 at Raniganj. It is affiliated with Kazi Nazrul University. 12. Raniganj Girls' College established in 1980 at Raniganj. It is affiliated with Kazi Nazrul University. Health Facilities Ballavpur Rural Hospital, with 50 beds, is the major government medical facility in Raniganj. Other hospitals located at Raniganj include Marwari Relief Society Hospital, Anandlok Hospital, B.N. Agarwal Memorial Hospital, Eye hospital, Kunusturia Area Hospital etc. Besides the above there is a Primary Health centre (PHC) at Raniganj. It functions with 25 beds. Also there are Primary Health Centres (PHC) at Baktarnagar and Tirat (with 6 beds each). Conclusion The implementation of the proposed project will increase employment opportunities to the local people. This will fetch income to the state exchequer. The project will provide impetus to further industrialization and urbanization of the area. It is likely the intending entrepreneurs will venture to set up micro and small scale units in the near future making the area a mixed society, dependent on industry, trade and business. With

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 69

Final EIA/EMP Report of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1,20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.-Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal by M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt Ltd the implementation of the project the occupational pattern of the people in the area may change making more people engaged in industrial and business activities. In the study area, there is large scope of improving basic amenities & social infrastructures facilities. It is expected that same will improve with operational running of the project and promoting the CER activities by the project proponent. The overall impact of the project is expected to be positive for the habitants of the area, the Government and the persons associated with the project. 3.14 ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY STUDY AREA The baseline study was conducted for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial and aquatic environment of the study area (10 Km radius from the project site). It includes core area that is the plant area and buffer area as 10 km area around the proposed project site. Core Zone No agricultural/commercial/forest/aquatic crops present within core zone. Whatever flora/fauna could be observed within core zone during visit and same has been given in the report and confirmed with the workers/officers of the project. Buffer Zone Agricultural/Commercial Crop/Plantation/Terrestrial Fauna survey locations: Aquatic flora/fauna: Damodar River, streams, rivulets in village ditches and small ponds. Occurrence of dense forest is very rare. Forest/ Trees and shrubs are present at uncultivable waste lands, adjacent to ponds, banks of rivers, along streams and rivulets. The objective of this floral inventory of the study area is to provide necessary information on floristic structure in the study area for formulating effective management and conservation measures. The climatic, edaphic and biotic variations with their complex interrelationship and composition of species, which are adapted to these variations, have resulted in different vegetation cover, characteristic of each region (Ohasi, 1975). The tree species, herbs, shrubs, climbers and major crops, were documented during this base line study (Jain, 1968; 1991). 3.14.1 Methodology Identification of vegetation in relation to natural forest flora and croplands was conducted through reconnaissance field surveys and insight observations of core and buffer zone areas. The plant species identification is done based on the morphological characteristics and reproductive materials i.e. flowers, fruits and seeds. Land use pattern in relation to agriculture practices and crop verities are identified through physical verification of farm lands. Secondary data gathered from local villager. The faunal elements (animal species) of core and buffer zone are identified by direct sightings or indirect evidences viz. pug marks, skeletal remains, scats and droppings etc. A Binocular is used for the observations. The authenticity of faunal elements occurrence is confirmed by interaction with the local forest department / people. Avifauna (bird’s species) identification is done with pictorial

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 70

descriptions of published literature. Information pertaining to existence of any migratory corridors and paths are obtained with local inhabitants. The status of each faunal element is determined and wildlife schedule is ascertained as per the IUCN-Red Data Book (RDB) and Indian wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972. 3.14.2 Observation of Biodiversity Study FLORA Terrestrial Flora Terrestrial and Aquatic flora of the project areas is classified in to:  Agriculture crops cultivated (cereals, pulses and vegetables) during rainy season (Kharif) and post rainy months of winter season (Rabi);  Commercial crops;  Natural vegetation of Forest type includes endemic species, endangered category and Aquatic flora.  Plantations and Agro-forestry species and  Grass lands There is almost no vegetation except few plants & local shrubs. Agricultural crop and Vegetables / Commercial crops are not present within the core zone of the project. Following species are present within the core zone. The area does not have any rare or endangered species. Table 3:16 List of Natural Vegetation in the Study Area S. No. Family Scientific Name Common Name 1 Anacardiaceae Mangifera indica Aam 2 Anacardiaceae Spondias pinnata Amra 3 Moraceae Ficus religiosa Ashathwa 4 Rutaceae Aegle marmelos Bel 5 Boraginaceae Cordia dichotoma Bohari 6 Moraceae Ficus racemosa Gular 7 Papilionaceae Sesbania sesban Jainti 8 Moraceae Tremaori entalis Jibanti 9 Moraceae Ficus retusa Jir bat 10 Myrtaceae Syzygium cumini Kalo jam 11 Papilionaceae Pongamia pinnata Karanja 12 Rutaceae Feronialimonia Kath bel 13 Rhamnaceae Ziziphus sps Kul 14 Annonaceae Annona reticulata Nona ata 15 Moraceae Ficus infectoria Pakur 16 Leguminosae Erythrina sps Palte madar 17 Tiliaceae Grewia asiatica Phalsa 18 Moringaceae Moringa oleifera Sajine 19 Moraceae Streblusasper Sehora 20 Bombacaceae Bombax ceiba Shimul 21 Mimosaceae Albizia lebbeck Sirish 22 Caesalpiniaceae Tamarindus indica Tentul

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 71

23 Moraceae Ficus benghalensis Bat gach 24 Moraceae Ficushispida Fig 25 Ebenaceae Diospyros affinis Gab 26 Moraceae Artocarpus sps Kanthal 27 Meliaceae Melia azedarach Mahanim 28 Meliaceae Azadirachta indica Neem 29 Caricaceae Carica papaya Pepe Source-Primary Survey

Table 3:17 Climber Species in the Study Area S. No. Family Scientific Name Common 1. Papilionaceae Mucuna prurita Alkushi 2. Loranthaceae Dendrophthoe falcata Baramanda 3. Asclepiadaceae Daemia extensa Chagul bati 4. Cucurbitaceae Luffa cylindrica Dhundhul 5. Compositae Mikania scandens Germany lata 6. Rubiaceae Paederia foetida Gandal 7. Menispermaceae Tinospora cordifolia Golancha 8. Apocynaceae Allamanda cathartica Harkakra 9. Aristolochiaceae Aristolochia indica Ishvarimul 10. Passifloraceae Passiflora foetida Jhumko lata 11. Cucurbitaceae Cucurbita maxima Kumro 12. Cucurbitaceae Momordica sps Kankrol 13. Convolvulaceae Lpomoea pes-tigridis Langulilata 14. Cucurbitaceae Lagenaria siceraria Lau 15. Cucurbitaceae Cucurbita pepo Misti kumra 16. Combretaceae Quisqualis indica Madhabi lata 17. Araceae Scindapsus aureus Money plant 18. Papilionaceae Derris scandens Noaloya 19. Liliaceae Asparagus racemosus Satamuli 20. Cucurbitaceae Coccinia cordifolia Telakucha Source-Primary Survey

Table 3:18 Grasses and Bamboos S. No. Family Scientific Name Common 1 Poaceae Chrysopogon sps Chorkata 2 Poaceae Eragrostis tenella Dhane 3 Poaceae Panicum maximum Gini ghas 4 Poaceae Bambusa vulgaris Golden 5 Poaceae Dactyloctenium sps Kakuriya 6 Poaceae Dendrocalamus sps Karail 7 Poaceae Saccharum sps Kash 8 Poaceae Oplismenus sps Krishna ghas 9 Cyperaceae Cyperus kyllingia Nirbishi 10 Cyperaceae Kyllinga monocephala Nirbishi 11 Poaceae Imperata cylindrica Ooloo grass 12 Poaceae Echinochloa colonum Shama Source-Primary Survey

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 72

Agricultural Crops The study area is mainly mono cropped. It was observed that the main agricultural crop in the area is Paddy (Oryza sativa). It is cultivated as kharif crop during rainy season. Besides Paddy, following crops are also observed. Table 3:19 List of Vegetable crops in the Buffer Zone Botanical Name Family Name Common/Local Name Citrus limon (L.) Burm f. Rutaceae Lemon Coriandrum stivum L. Apiaceae Coriander, Dhanya Beta vulgaris L. Chenopodiaceae Beet Root Cucurbita maxima Duch ex Lam. Cucurbitaceae Pumpkin Daucus carota L. Brassicaceae Carrot Capsicum annum L. Solanaceae Chilly Lycopersicum esculentum L. Solanaceae Tomato Mentha arvensis L. Lamiaceae Mint Momordic charantia L. Cucurbitaceae Bitter Gourd Rhapanus sativus L. Brassicceae Radish Solanum melongena L. Solanaceae Brinjal Solanum tuberosum L. Solanaceae Potato Trichosanthes anguina L. Cucurbitaceae Snake Guard Trichosanthes cucumerina Cucurbitaceae Parwal Brassica nigra (L.) Koch Brasicaceae Mustard Brassica oleracea L. Var Brassicaceae Cabbage Source-Primary Survey Natural vegetation / forest types Occurrence of dense forest is very rare. Some patches of village forests are present within the buffer zone. The information for the same was also collected from the villagers. The list of natural vegetation is given below in table. Table 3:20 List of Natural Vegetation in the Buffer Zone Habit Botanical Name Family Name Common Name Trees Acacia catechu (L) Willd. Leguminosae Kath Alangium salvifolium (L) Wang Alangiaceae Ankola Albizia lebbeck (L.) Benth Leguminosae Sirish Artocarpus heterophyllus Lam. Moraceae Jack Borassus flabellifer L. Arecaceae Palm Bridelia airi shawii P.T. Li Euphorbiaceae Spinous kino Butea monosperma (Lam.) Taub. Leguminosae treePolash Ehretia laevis Roxb. Boraginaceae Chamror Causine glauca (Rottb.)Kuntze Celastraceae Elaeodendron Euphorbia nivulea Buch-Ham Euphorbiaceae glaucumLeafy milk hedge Ficus benghalensis L. Moraceae Banyan Ficus hispida L. Moraceae Wild fig Ficus racemosa L. Moraceae Fig

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 73

Habit Botanical Name Family Name Common Name Ficus religiosa L. Moraceae Peepal tree Haldinia cordifolia (Roxb.) Ridsd Rubiaceae Kadam Holoptelia integrifoila (Roxb.) Ulmaceae Tapasi PlanchMadhuca indica J F Gmel Sapotaceae Mahua Mangifera indica L. Anacardiaceae Mango, Aam Phoenix sylvestris (L.) Roxb. Arecaceae Date Phyllanhus emblica L. Phyllanthaceae Amla Salmalia malabarica (DC) Schott Bombacaceae Silk cotton EndlStreblus asper Lour. Moraceae Sand paper tree Syzygium cuminii (L.) Skeels Myrtaceae Jamun Terminalia arjuna (Roxb.) Wt &Arn. Combretaceae Arjun Ziziphus mauritiana Lamk. Rhamnaceae Wild ber Shrubs Achyranthus aspera L. Amaranthacea Chirchita Adhatoda zeylanica Medik. eAcanthaceae Vasaka Blumea membranacea DC Asteraceae Sunflower family Chloris barbata Sw. Poaceae herbSwollen finger Chromolena odorata (L.) King Asteraceae grassJack in the bush RoinsonCleome viscosa L. Cleomaceae Asian spider Dentella repens (L.) Forst. Rubiaceae flowerAegyptian grass Eclipta prostrata L. Asteraceae Bringa raj Glinus oppositifolius (L.) A. DC Molluginaceae Jima, Ghima Hyptia suaveolens (L.) Poit Lamiaceae Ban tulasi Ipomoea carnea Jacq. Convolvulacea Besharam Leonotis nepetifolia (L.) R.Br. eLamiaceae Lal guma Nyctanthus arbortristis L. Oleaceae Har singar Ocimum canum Sims Lamiaceae African basil Pedilanthus tithymaloides (L.) Poit. Euphorbiaceae Devils back bone Peristrophe bicalyculata (Retz) Acanthaceae Kali Angedi NeesPogostemon bengalensis (Burm f) Lamiaceae Juhilata Sida acuta L. Malvaceae Bala Solanum sisymbrifolium Lamk. Solanaceae Stick night Tephrosia purpurea (L.) Pers Leguminosae shadeSarapunkha Veronica anagallis-aquatica L. Scrophulariace Water speedwell Grass Vetiveria zizanioides (L.) Nash aePoaceae Khus Khus Imperata cylindrical (L.) Raeusch Poaceae Cogon grass Cyanodon dactylon L. Poaceae Durva Hetropogon contortus (L.) Beauv ex Poaceae Tangle head RoemSetaria &Schult verticillata (L.) P. Beauv. Poaceae Hooked bristle Climbers Asparagus racemosus Willd. Asparagaceae grassshatavari Capparis zeylanica L. Capparaceae Aranda Dioscorea pentaphylla L. Dioscoreaceae Kanta alu Ichnocarpus frutiscens (L.) R.Br. Apocynaceae Kali dhoodi Ipomoea obscura (L.) Ker Gawl. Convolvulaceae Pan bel Wattakaka volubilis (L.f) Stap f Apocynaceae Akad bel Mikania scandens Willd. Asteraceae Mikania Passiflora foetida L. Passifloraceae scandensFoetid Passon flower Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 74

Habit Botanical Name Family Name Common Name Quisqualia indica L. Combretaceae Rangoon Ventilago maderapatana Gaertn Rhamnaceae creeperPitti Ziziphus oenoplia (L.) Schott Rhamnaceae Jacklar Jujube Source-Primary Survey Aquatic Flora Aquatic flora was identified by inspecting water of Damodar River, Nallas and water bodies etc. The information for the same was collected from villagers also. Table 3:21 List of Aquatic Plants in Buffer Zone Botanical Name Family Name Trade / Local Name Azolla pinnata R.Br. Salviniaceae Duck weed fern Colocasia esculenta (L.) Schott Araceae Arvi, Kachalu Murdannia nudiflora (L.) Brenan Commelinaceae Creeping day flower Gnaphalium polycaulon Pers Asteraceae Sunflower family herb Hygrophylla auriculata (K.Schum) Haine Acanthaceae Kokilaksha Eichhornia crassipes (Mart)Solms Pontederiaceae Water hyacinth Ipomoea aquatica Forssk. Convolvulaceae Nali Marsilea quadrifida L. Marsiliaceae Four leaved clover Phyla nodiflora (L.) Grene Verbenaceae Jala pippali Polygonum laxum Rchb. Polygonaceae Polygonum laxum Tamarix aphylla (L.) Karst. Tamarixaceae Athel pine, Farash Source-Primary Survey RARE AND ENDANGERED FLORA IN THE STUDY AREA The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. Out of 17,000 species of higher plants known to occur in India, nearly 614 higher plant species were evaluated by IUCN. Among them 247 species are under threatened category (IUCN, 2008). Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category by Red data book of Indian Plants (Jain and Sastry, 1984; Nayar and Sastry, 1987; 1988; 1990; Oldfield et al., 1998; Kholia and Bhakuni, 2009) and Red list of threatened Vascular plants (IUCN, 2010).

Wildlife Reserve/National Park/Reserve Forest in the study area There is no National Park, Biosphere Reserve or Wildlife Sanctuary within 10 km radius w.r.t project site. There is one forest under PF i.e. Gangajal Ghati PF. FAUNA The aquatic habitats consist of Damodar River, Ponds; Ditches and water-logged areas were represented by fin-fish (fishes). The information for the same is collected from local people also. The faunal species encountered during primary survey are listed in table below. A. MAMMALS

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 75

Family Name Zoological Name Common Name Status in IUCN / RDB wildlife (Protection)Act Cercopithecid Macaca mulatta Bandar 1972Sch-II LC aeCanidae Vulpes vulpes Fox Sch-II LC Canidae Cuon alpinus Wild Dog Sch-II LC Felidae Felis chaus Jungle Cat Sch-II LC Canidae Canis aureus Jackal Sch-II LC Hyaenidae Hyaena hyaena Hyaena Sch-III LC Suidae Sus scrofa Wild Pig Sch-III LC Herpestidae Herpestes edwardsi Indian Grey Sch-II LC Muridae Mus booduga MongooseIndian Field Mouse Sch-V, Sec, 5 LC Sciuridae Funambulus Palm Squirrel Sch-IV LC Source-Primary Surveypalmarum B. BIRDS

Status in wildlife IUCN / Family Zoological Name Common Name (Protection) Act RDB Ardeidae Bubulcus ibis Cattle egret Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Ardeidae Ardeola grayii Indian pond heron Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Accipitridae Milvus migrans Black kite Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Streptopelia Columbidae Spotted dove Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC chinensis Alcedinidae Alcedo atthis Small bluekingfisher Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC White-breasted Alcedinidae Halcyon smyrensis Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC kingfisher Columbidae Columbia livia Pigeon Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Phasianidae Hasianus colchicus Indian Ring fowl Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Galloperdix Phasianidae Common Spur Fowl Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC bicalcarata Anatidae Anas discors Blue Winged Teal Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Eudynamys Cuculidae Indian Koel Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC scolopacea Passeridae Passer domesticus Common Sparrow Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Sturnidae Acridotheres tristis Myna Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Passeridae Passer domesticus Sparrow Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Podicipedidae Tachybaptus Little Grebe Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC ruficollis Striidae Athene noctua Little Owl Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Meropidae Merops Chestnut-headed Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC leschenaultia Bee-eater Apodidae Apus apus Common Swift Sch-IV, Sec,11 LC Source-Primary Survey

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 76

C. REPTILES Status in Wildlife IUCN / Family Name Zoological Name Common Name (Protection) Act RDB Colubridae Xenochrophispiscator Dhanda II LC Agamidae Calotes versicolar Garden lizard IV LC Elapidae Naja naja Common cobra IV LC Colubridae Natrix piscator Water snake IV LC Colubridae Zamenis mucosus Rat snake II LC Source-Primary Survey D. AMPHIBIANS Status in IUCN / Family Name Zoological Name Common Name Wildlife RDB (Protection) Act Bufonidae Bufo melanostictus Common toad IV LC Dicroglossidae Euphlyctis hexadactyla Common frog IV LC Dicroglossidae Rana hexadactyla Green pond frog IV LC Dicroglossidae Rana tigrina Indian bull frog IV LC Source-Primary Survey Domestic Animals The domesticated animals like Goat (Capra aegagrus); Buffalo (Bubalus bubalis); Cow (Bos primigenius); Horse (Equus caballus); Ass (Equus hemionus) and Dog (Canis lupus familaris) were found in villages. Fishes Though species of reptiles, amphibia and molluscs are in terrestrial ecology as well as in aquatic ecology, but fish species are completely in aquatic ecology. Family Name Zoological Name Common Name Status in Wildlife (Protection) Act Cyprinidae Cirrhinay mrigala Mirikali IV Cyprinidae Catla catla Bhakur IV Channidae Ophiocephalus marulius Sala IV Channidae Ophiocephalus steiatus Seul IV Siluridae Wallagoattu Balia IV Cyprinidae Labeo rohita Rohu IV Clupeidae Hilsa ilisha Ilish IV Source-Secondary Source Rare and Endangered Fauna of Study Area The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies. These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 77

Final EIA/EMP Report of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1,20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.-Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal by M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt Ltd the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity. IUCN, (2008) has evaluated 1976 animal species from India, among them 313 have in recognized as threatened species. Among them one species is considered as extinct, while 44 species are in critically endangered (CR) category, 88 is in endangered category (EN), while 181 is considered as vulnerable (VU). Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide for the protection of wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with a view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country. Some of the sighted fauna was given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 by including them in different schedules. There is one sighted species falls under schedule -I of Wildlife Protection Act 1972. 3.15 CONCLUSION The objective of the study was to identify the REET species in term of flora and fauna, conquering to the objective, all the hotspots as identified on desktop study were covered. Some part of study area is having sparse vegetation and very few lakes/ponds were observed. One protected forest is situated on the other side of Damodar River at a distance of 8 km from the project site. The dominant trees in the study area are Mangifera indica L (Mango trees) Azadirachta indica (Neem), Plumeria rubra L. (Champa), Babool (Acacia nilotica), Casuarina equisetifolia L. (Casuarina), Dalbergia sisoo L. (Shisham),. The dominant shrub community in this area was represented by Prosopis juliflora, Calotropis procera, Cereus peruvianus, Xanthium strumarium L., Abelmoschus manihot L., Hibiscus rosa sinensis L.,. The common birds observed in the study area are Accipiter badius, Halcyon coromanda, Anhinga melanogaster, Apus apus, Egretta garzetta, Columba livia, Streptopelia orientalis, Anthus campestris, Motacilla cinerea, Motacilla flava, Nectarinia asiatica, Phalacrocorax fuscicollis, Pycnonotus cafer, Limosa limosa, Platalea ajaja, etc. Monkey (Macaca mulatta), Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsii), Due to high industrialization and urbanization in Durgapur-Raniganj-Asansol belt, the biodiversity of flora and fauna (occurrence and density) is poor. Whatever open spaces are available is covered under paddy cultivation. Flow and water quality of Damodar river is depleted and deteriorated. The variety of fish and its catch is poor due to low / stagnant flow of the Damodar river. The ponds of the area are mainly used for bathing the cattle population. Fish cultivation is not done in the village ponds.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 78

CHAPTER-4 : ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND ITS MITIGATION MEASURES 4.1 INTRODUCTION As a part of present EIA study, anticipated environmental impacts associated with the proposed project activity of the unit have been identified. This chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts from the proposed project. The impacts have been assessed for the proposed project activities have been covered under baseline environmental monitoring and continue to remain same till the operation of the project. The construction and operational phase of the proposed steel project comprises various activities, each of which may have an impact on some or the other environmental parameters. The affected environmental attributes in the region are air quality, water quality, soil, land use, ecology and public health. The proposed project would create impact on the environment in two distinct phases:  During the construction phase which may be regarded as temporary or short term; and  During the operation phase which would have long term effects. 4.2 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE This includes the activities related to construction will be undertaken at storage area within plant and other related structures. The probable impacts during construction phase on various sectors of environment (such as air, water, soil, biotic, socio-economic environment etc.) have been identified and listed in Table 4.1. Table 4:1 Impact Identification Matrix (During Construction Phase)

Parameters Environmental Attributes

Air

Soil

SHW

Socio

Noise

Water LU/LC

Hydro

Geology Geology

Hazards

Risk and Risk

Economic Ecology and Activities Biodiversity Transportation of Materials and ✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Machinery Operation of ✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ - ✔ Machinery and DG Set Construction Water - ✔ - ✔ ------Construction of ✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Building Wastewater Disposal - ✔ ✔ ------✔ Waste Disposal - ✔ ✔ ------✔ Greenbelt ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ - - ✔ ✔ Development Recruitment - ✔ - - - - - ✔ ✔ - ✔

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 79

Table 4:2 Severity Criteria for Magnitude of Impacts Impact S.No Category Description of Category Adverse Beneficial 1. No Impact -- 0 0 No Appreciable 2. Short Term Reversible -1 1 Impact 3. Significant Impact Long Term Reversible -2 2 4. Major Impact Irreversible but of Lesser Extent -3 3 5. High Impact Irreversible but of Medium Extent -4 4 6. Permanent Impact Severe Irreversible Impact -5 5

Figure 4.1 Impacts vs. Probability Chart

Table 4:3 Cumulative Score Range for Beneficial and Adverse Impacts Cumulative S.No Meaning Score 1. +ve / -ve Beneficial Impact / Adverse Impact 2. 0-150 No appreciable Beneficial Impact / Adverse Impact Appreciable but reversible adverse impact-mitigation 3. 151-300 measures are needed Significant adverse impacts: most of the impacts are 4. 301-450 reversible. Mitigation measures are crucial. Major adverse impacts; most of the impacts are reversible. 5. 451-600 Alternative site selection to be considered. Permanent irreversible impact; alternatives to the project 6. >600 need to be explored

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 80

Table 4:4 Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix without Mitigation Measures (Construction Phase) Environmental Attributes

Parameters

Air

Soil

SHW

Total

Socio

Noise

Water LU/LC

Hydro

Geology Geology

Hazards

Risk and Risk Economic

Activities Ecology and Biodiversity Transportation and Storage of Construction -6 - -2 -4 - - - -2 -2 -6 +4 -18 Material/Equipmen t Operation of Machinery and DG -4 - -2 -4 - - - -2 -4 - +2 -14 Set Construction Water - -4 - -2 ------6 Construction of -2 - -2 -2 - - - -2 -2 - +2 -8 Building Wastewater - -4 +4 ------4 -4 Disposal Waste Disposal -2 - -2 - - - - -2 -2 -2 -2 -12 Greenbelt +4 -4 +2 +2 -2 -2 -2 - - +4 +2 4 Development Recruitment - -4 ------4 -4 - +4 -8 Total -10 -16 -2 -10 -2 -2 -2 -12 -14 -4 8 -66 Total Cumulative Score for various Environmental Parameters without mitigation measures is -66 which no appreciable adverse impact during construction phase. 4.3 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE. 4.3.1 Air Environment Table 4:5 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Air Environment Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation and  Fugitive Dust  Construction materials will be Storage of Emissions due to covered with tarpaulin sheets to Construction Material vehicle avoid dust generation. /Equipment Movement  Construction debris will be sprinkled  Building Construction  Emissions due to with water and kept moist.  Operation of DG Set handling of  Regular water sprinkling will be  Waste Disposal constructional done to avoid dust generation from  Greenbelt vehicles and transportation and stored material. Development equipment  Only valid PUC vehicle will be used  Recruitment deployed result for the transportation of materials

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 81

Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures in marginal and equipment. increase in the  No open air burning of any kind of levels of SOx, wastes will be allowed. NOx and PM.  DG Set will be used in case of power  Air impact will failure, stack height of 11 m is confined within provided for proper dispersion of the project pollutants. boundary.  Adequate greenbelt (2.74 Ha) will be developed as per guideline.

4.3.2 Water Environment Table 4:6 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Water Environment Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Construction Water  Run-off from  Proper sanitation facility for  Wastewater/Solid Storage Areas of construction workers during work at Waste Disposal Construction site.  Recruitment Material  Proper storm water drainage system at  Water pollution construction site. due to disposal  Domestic wastewater will be treated in of untreated proposed STP sewage, spillages  Water consumption will be minimized of raw material. through following steps:  Generation of 1. Water (curing) will be sprayed on water pool in concrete structures. constructional 2. Concrete structures will be area. covered with thick cloth/gunny bags and then water should be sprayed on them. This will ensure sustained and complete curing. 3. Good construction practices to avoid water logging on site.  The water will be sourced through municipal water supply and hence potential impact on groundwater resources is not envisaged as no ground water will be abstracted for construction purpose.

4.3.3 Soil Environment Table 4:7 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Soil Environment Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 82

Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation and  Compaction of soil  The construction material and Storage of due to vehicular diesel/oil to be used for various Construction movement. construction activities will be Material/Equipment  Contamination of the stored in designated storage  Construction of soils due to spillages, yards to reduce the spills. Building construction  Domestic wastewater will be  Wastewater/Solid materials such as treated in proposed STP and will Waste Disposal cement, sand, oils, be used for agricultural and  Greenbelt etc. water sprinkling. Development  Soil contamination due to disposal of untreated sewage.  Positive impact due to Greenbelt.

4.3.4 Noise Environment Table 4:8 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Noise Environment Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation and  Noise generation due  Only valid PUC certified vehicle Storage of Construction to vehicular will be used for the Material/ Equipment movement, transportation of materials and  Construction of operation of equipment. Building construction  Construction activities will be  Operation of DG Set. machineries and D.G. allowed only during day time.  Greenbelt Development set/  Machinery used for  Recruitment  Continuous noise construction will be of high may cause negative standard of reputed make and impact on workers will adhere to standards.  Decreases the  Lubrication will be carried-out efficiency of worker. periodically for machinery.  Lake of  Use of only well-maintained concentration construction equipment and  Positive impact due transportation vehicles. to Greenbelt.  Vibration control damped tools will be used.  Provision of PPEs like earmuffs/earplug to avoid adverse effects of noise on workers.  DG Set will be provided with acoustic enclosures and will be

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 83

Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures used only in case of power failure/emergency.  Adequate greenbelt (6.76 Acre) will be developed as per guideline for prevention of noise propagation outside the plant premises.

4.3.5 Land Use/Land Cover Table 4:9 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Land Use Details Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Construction of  Land cover of area will be  Changes inevitable, however Buildings changed into factory specific measures like suitable  Greenbelt building which will be planning and execution of Development converted in to industrial activities purpose.  Keep landscape an integral  No major impact on LU/LC part of design  Conservation of land  Drainage network will be resource due to greenbelt designed keeping in mind the development on 600 m2 area natural drainage pattern. which is positive impact.  Regular maintenance and  Additional natural green watering of greenbelt will be scenic beauty and asthetic done. conditions will be created.

4.3.6 Hydrogeology Construction water (50 KLD max) will be supplied by ADDA/Private water tanker. No surface water or ground water will be used. No streams or nala will be diverted. There is no significant impact on Hydrogeology due to project activity during Construction Phase. 4.3.7 Geology No building materials will be extracted from the project site. Cement, Aggregates, sand, and steel will be procured local vendors. There is no significant impact on Geology due to project activity during Construction Phase. 4.3.8 Hazardous/ Solid Waste Table 4:10 Impact due to Hazardous/Solid Waste and its Mitigation Measures Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Construction of  Construction waste  Construction waste will be Building may cause negative categorized in to recyclable and  Wastewater/Solid impact, if not non-recyclable and stored

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 84

Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures Waste Disposal disposed properly. separately.  Recruitment  Waste generation  Recyclable construction waste will due to fuel leakage/ be sent for recycling and non- spillage from recyclable waste will be sent to construction authorize dealers for disposal. equipment or  Other wastes will be disposed off vehicles. adequately.  Generation of solid waste from the domestic activities of workforce.

4.3.9 Risk/Hazardous Table 4:11 Impact due to Risk & Hazards and its Mitigation Measures Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation and  Chances of  All the construction related Storage of accident during activities will be carried out under Construction construction, the supervision and control of Material/ Equipment transportation management.  Construction of and operation of  The Vehicles must be maintained in Building DG set. good condition and checked  DG Set operation  Occupational thoroughly at least once a week by  Wastewater/Solid Health hazard the competent person authorized by Waste Disposal due to untreated the Management. sewage/ waste  PPE will be provided.  Domestic wastewater will be treated in proposed STP.

4.3.10 Ecology and Biodiversity Table 4:12 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Ecology & Biodiversity Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation and  Transportation of  There is no forest land involved in Storage of Construction project and no ecologically Construction material by the sensitive area located within 10 km Material/Equipmen trucks/dumper will of the project site. Hence impact t disturb the due to proposed project is not  Green Belt movement of animal envisaged. Development and birds.  Transportation of construction  Fugitive emission materials will be schedule in such a from vehicle way to minimize the truck trips and

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 85

Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures movement will cannot do it in night. affects the growth of  The proposed activities do not plants. envisage destruction of habitat and  Pollutant from the feeding or breeding area of faunal proposed activity species. Further, development of can affect the growth plantation will provide habitat, food of plants. and breeding areas for small  Positive impact due animals and insects. Thus a positive to Greenbelt. impact is envisaged.  No rare or endangered species of fauna are reported to exist in the area. Thus, no impacts on rare/endangered species are envisaged due to normal operations.

4.3.11 Socio-Economy Table 4:13 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Socio-Economic Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation  Employment opportunity for  Indirect positive benefit to and Storage of skilled as well as unskilled local businessmen as they Construction local construction workers. will get opportunity to supply Material/  Positive impact due to construction materials. Equipment Greenbelt.  Local agencies will be  Construction of  Beneficial to local appointed for transportation Building transporters for short period of materials /machineries.  Greenbelt of time.  Preference will be given to Development  Temporary job opportunity local villagers in terms of  Recruitment for local villagers providing employment.

Table 4:14 Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix with Mitigation Measures (Construction Phase) Environmental Attributes

Parameters

Air

Soil

SHW

Total

Noise

Water LU/LC

Hydro

Geology Geology

Hazards Risk and Risk

Activities Ecology and

Biodiversity SocioEconomi

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 86

Transportation and Storage of - -3 - -2 -4 - - - -2 -2 -6 4 Construction 15 Material/Equipment Operation of - -2 - -2 -4 - - - -2 -4 - 2 Machinery and DG Set 12 Construction Water - -2 - -2 ------4 Construction of -2 - -2 -2 - - - -2 -2 - 2 -8 Building Wastewater Disposal - -2 4 ------4 -2 - -2 - -2 - - - - -2 -2 -2 -2 Waste Disposal 12 Greenbelt 6 -4 4 6 6 - - - - 6 2 26 Development Recruitment - -4 ------4 -4 - 4 -8 - - -3 -12 0 -6 6 0 0 -14 -2 8 Total 12 35 Total Cumulative Score for various Environmental Parameters with mitigation measures is -35 which appreciable adverse impact is during operation phase. 4.4 ASSESSMENT OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DURING OPERATION PHASE. Probable impacts on various sectors of environment during operation and operation phase are given in Table 4.15.

Table 4:15 Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix without Mitigation Measures (During Operation Phase) Parameters Environmental Attributes

Air

Soil

SHW

Socio

Noise

Water LU/LC

Hydro

Geology Geology

Hazards

Risk and Risk

Economic Ecology and Activities Biodiversity Transportation and ✔ - ✔ ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Utilities Operation Product and Raw Material Handling, ✔ ✔ - ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Storage and Processing Manufacturing ✔ ✔ - ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Process Sewage and Effluent - ✔ - ✔ - - - ✔ ✔ - ✔ Generation Solid/ Hazardous - - ✔ - - - - ✔ ✔ - - Waste Disposal

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 87

Green Belt ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ - - ✔ ✔ Development Recruitment - ✔ - - - - - ✔ - - ✔

Table 4:16 Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix without Mitigation Measures (During Operation Phase) Parameters Environmental Attributes

Air

Soil

SHW

Total

Socio

Noise

Water LU/LC

Hydro

Geology Geology

Hazards

Risk and Risk

Economic Ecology and Activities Biodiversity Transportation and Utilities -25 - -4 -15 - - - -4 -12 -15 -12 -87 Operation Product and Raw Material Handling, -25 -6 - -12 - - - -12 -15 -12 -2 -84 Storage and Processing Manufacturing -25 -12 - -15 - - - -12 -12 -12 -8 -96 process Sewage and Effluent - -12 - -6 - - - -12 -12 - -5 -47 Generation Solid/ Hazardous - - -12 - - - - -12 -9 - - -33 Waste Disposal Green Belt 12 -9 4 6 4 -4 -4 - - 9 6 24 Development Recruitment - -9 ------6 - - 12 -3

Total -63 -48 -12 -42 4 -4 -4 -58 -60 -30 -9 -326

Total Cumulative Score for various Environmental Parameters without mitigation measures is – 326 which has Significant adverse impacts: most of the impacts are reversible. Mitigation measures are crucial.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 88

4.5 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATIONMEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE 4.5.1 Air Environment 4.5.2 Emission from Stack It is absolutely essential to study the impacts of air pollution on its environs due to the proposed expansion project. These impacts are assessed with the help of Mathematical model based on steady state Gaussian Plume Dispersion Model designed for multiple point sources for short term. In the present case, Industrial Source Complex Short Term (ISC-3), 1993 dispersion model based on steady state Gaussian plume dispersion, designed for multiple point sources for short term developed by United States Environment Protection Agency (USEPA) has been used for simulations from point sources. Model Input Emissions: The stack emissions from the proposed units, Fugitive emissions, Vehicular emissions are considered for modeling. The emission data from the stacks of proposed units is shown in Table 4.17 Receptor Locations The software is capable of generating a polar receptor grid at every 10 radial angles at specified distances (in Kms). Air Quality Dispersion Modeling was carried out by following the CPCB guidelines. PREDICTION OF IMPACTS & MITIGATION MEASURES Impact Environment Identified Impacts `Mitigation Measures Air Environment Particulate emissions Coal transportation Covered trucks Unloading of coal Dust suppression system (fog type and water spray system) Coal Handling Plant Dust extraction system with bag- filters Coal transfer points Dust extraction system with bag- filters Coal conveying Covered conveyers to prevent flying of dust during conveying Stacks attached to the Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) DRI Kiln, FBC Boiler will be provided to bring down the PM to 30 mg/Nm3 for DRI Kilns and 30 mg/Nm3 for Power plant Stacks attached to SMS Fume extraction system with bag filters will be provided to treat the flue gases from Steel Melting Shop (SMS). Ash handling & storage Fly ash will be stored in silos only. Vehicular movement All internal roads will be made Pucca.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 89

Avenue plantation will be developed on both sides of village roads and internal roads. Sulphur dioxide Dolomite will be used as Raw emissions material in DRI kilns to act as sulphur absorbent. We will install CFBC Boiler, which will have provision for lime dosing with fuel so as to control SO2 emission within the norms as per the as per MoEF&CC emission standards applicable from 1st January 2017. NOx emissions The combustion temperature in CFBC Boiler will be maintained below 875 0C. By maintaining the solid circulation rate. Hence, NOx concentration will be brought down to < 100 mg/Nm3 as per MoEF&CC emission standards applicable from 1st January 2017. Meteorological input data Data generated at the project site (wind speed, wind direction, ambient temperature was used for modeling. Mixing height data was obtained from CPCB publication. Stability class data was computed dusing the wind speed and cloud cover. Model input options for terrain, plume rise and deposition: Since 50% of land inside a circle of 3 km radius around the site does not have considerable commercial or residential or other build-up units, rural flat terrain and briggs rural dispersion coefiicients has been considered. Briggs plume rise equation for various stability class has been considered. Deposition of pollutants on land, building surface, tree cover, humidity/ moisture, water bodies, etc are not considered, hence the results are overestimates. The ARP is the stack that has the maximum release rate (DRI ESP stack). Similar stacks located within 50 m distance are grouped into single stack, as per the Guidelines. The locations of receptors are defined with respect to Cartesian Grid of dimensions 10 km x 10 km area. Fugitive dust emissions load are included in the individual plant dedusting systems. Isopleths (Iso-concentration plots) were drawn on SOI Toposheet. Table 4:17 Emission Inventory of the Steel Plant S. Stack No of Height Dia Velocit Temp APCD PM SO2 NOX O N. attached to stack M M y K Load Load Load m/s (g/sec) (g/sec) (g/sec) 1. DRI-Coal Stack 1 30 1.0 9.0 298 Bag 0.21 - - Handling Filter System 2. DRI-Iron Stack 1 30 1.0 9.0 298 Bag 0.21 - - Ore Filter Handling

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 90

3 DRI Plant - Stack 1 30 1.0 15 298 Bag 0.35 - - Product Filter Handling 4. DRI- Cooler Stack 1 30 1.0 7.1 298 Bag 0.17 - - Discharge Filter 5. DRI Kiln & Stack 1 70 2.4 15 413 DSC, 1.5 32.4 4.9 WHRB ESP 6. Power Plant Stack 1 30 1.0 7.2 298 Bag 0.17 - Coal Filter Handling 7 Power Stack 1 70 2.0 20 413 ESP & 1.3 4.5 4.5 . Plant- FGD 8 SMS Stack 1 30 1.0 14.2 350 Bag 0.5 0.5 1.0 . Filter 9 Rolling Mill Stack 1 30 1.4 10 513 Gas - - 3.6 . fired RHF Total, g/s 4.4 37.4 14 Total,kg/da 381 3231 1210 y Impact Assessment The incremental glc (ground level concentration) values are estimated for 24-hour average period. The highest ground level concentration (GLC) is superimposed over the observed ambient values of PM10, SO2 and NOx and the resultant scenario is shown in Table Table 4:18 Impact of Air Quality of the Study Area due to the Proposed Project (24-h avg in µg/m3) Param Background Predicted MGLC Superimpo NAAQS Contribution eter level, Maximum sed (Nov by proposed Maximum in Ground Level Concentrati 2009) project to study area Concentration on NAAQS SO2 12.9 4.7 17.6 80 6%

NOX 30.0 3.2 33.2 80 4%

PM10 86 3.6 89.6 100 3.6%

PM2.5 49 1.2 50.2 60 2.45%

The incremental GLC values of PM10, SO2 and NOx around the project site are presented as isopleths in the Figure 4.2 to 4.4. The maximum incremental GLC of PM10, SO2 and NOx from the project will be 3.6 g/m3, 4.7 g/m3 and 3.2 g/m3 respectively. The maximum glc values are occurring at a distance of 0.5 to 1 km area towards the southwest direction of ARP (DRI ESP stack). The ambient air quality will remain within the prescribed standards.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 91

10000.00

8000.00

6000.00

4000.00

2000.00

0.00

-2000.00

-4000.00

-6000.00

-8000.00

-10000.00 -10000.00 -8000.00 -6000.00 -4000.00 -2000.00 0.00 2000.00 4000.00 6000.00 8000.00 10000.00 Figure 4.2 Isopleths of PM10 Around the Project

10000.00

8000.00

6000.00

4000.00

2000.00

0.00

-2000.00

-4000.00

-6000.00

-8000.00

-10000.00 -10000.00 -8000.00 -6000.00 -4000.00 -2000.00 0.00 2000.00 4000.00 6000.00 8000.00 10000.00 Figure 4.3 Isopleths of SO2 Around the Project

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 92

10000.00

8000.00

6000.00

4000.00

2000.00

0.00

-2000.00

-4000.00

-6000.00

-8000.00

-10000.00 -10000.00 -8000.00 -6000.00 -4000.00 -2000.00 0.00 2000.00 4000.00 6000.00 8000.00 10000.00 Figure 4.4 Isopleths of NOx Around the Project

Table 4:19 Impact of Air Quality of the Study Area (Worst case, APCD working at 50% efficiency) (24-h avg in µg/m3) Param Background Predicted MGLC Superimposed NAAQS eter level, Maximum Maximum Ground Concentration (Nov in study area Level Concentration 2009) SO2 12.9 37 49.9 80

NOX 30.0 16 33.2 80

PM10 86 36 122 100

PM2.5 49 12 61 60

4.5.3 Emission from Transportation Vehicles The sources likely to be affecting the pollutant concentrations in project area would be emission from vehicles used for transportation. Movement of truck frequency on monthly basis is calculated based on existing traffic. It is estimated that total 124 Nos. of trucks/day will be arriving / leaving the project site in a month. Proposed project connects to National Highway NH-60 (2.8 km towards West) and NH-2 (Approx. 0.3 km towards ENE). Proposed project will attract to commercial vehicles as a result traffic load will also increase on highways. Traffic load play a major role in polluting the air. To assess the traffic load, 4 no. of surveyors were appointed to survey for NH-2 and NH-60.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 93

Traffic data collected continuously for 24 hours by visual observation and counting of vehicles under three categories, viz., heavy motor vehicles, light motor vehicles and two/three wheelers. As traffic densities on the roads are high, two persons were deployed simultaneously at each station during each shift- one person on each of the two directions for counting the traffic. At the end of each hour, fresh counting and recording was undertaken. Total numbers of vehicles per hour under the three categories were determined. Traffic study is conducted on NH-60 and NH-2. Impact Due to Transport: The sources likely to be affecting the pollutant concentrations in project area would be vehicular emission due to transportation in project. On account of various associated activities, there will be increased vehicular traffic on connecting roads. Generation of gaseous emissions is therefore, of primary concern. Modeling studies frequency of vehicles has been calculated for the proposed expansion project. Impact on Traffic Density: Enhanced Traffic on Road Adequacy: With present level of traffic and the increase in existing traffic due to the project during operational phase has been estimated by comparison with the recommendations stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC). Table 4:20 Traffic Scenario Total No. of No. of Passenge Total No. of Vehicles Vehicle S.No Vehicles/Day r Car Unit Vehicle in PCU Distribution (PCU)/Hour (PCU) NH-2 NH-60 NH-2 NH-60 NH-2 NH-60 1. Cars 15,360 9,792 1.0 15,360 9,792 640 408 2. Buses 400 120 3.0 1,200 360 50 15 3. Trucks 1,520 1200 3.0 4,560 3,600 190 150 Two 4. 10,080 5,760 0.5 5,040 2,880 210 120 Wheelers Three 5. 192 320 0.75 144 240 6 10 Wheelers Total 27,552 17,192 26,304 16,872 1,096 703

Table 4:21 Recommendations on Traffic Capacity as per IRC 2010 Category of Maximum Existing Dispatch Ratio LOS S .No Road PCU/h V/C Ratio (%) 1. NH-60 703 0.29 80 B 2. NH-2 1,096 0.20 20 B Source: IRC:SP:37:2010

Part A It is estimated that 1,446 Nos. of trucks per month will be required for various industrial activities Traffic load on internal and external road is calculated as under, Total trucks = 60 trucks/Day Frequency of trucks (Nos. of trucks x cycle x up and down) = 60 x 1 x 2 = 120 Nos./Day PCU/Day (Nos. of truck x 3) = 120 x 3 = 360 PCU/Day

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 94

PCU per hour = 15 Part B No of people to be employed = 300 Nos. Cars of the employees = 10 Nos. Two wheelers of the employees = 30 Nos. Frequency of cars (Nos. of cars x cycle x up and down) = 10 x 1 x 2 = 20 No’s/Day PCU / day (Nos. of car x 1) = 20 x 1 = 20 PUC/Day Frequency of two wheelers (Nos. of two wheelers x cycle x up and down) = 30 x 1 x 2 = 60 No’s/Day PCU/Day (Nos. of two wheeler x 0.5) = 60 x 0.5 = 30 PUC/Day PCU per hour = 1.25 Grand Total PCU/h (A+B) = 15 + 1.25 = 16.25 say 17 PCU/h Table 4:22 Modified Traffic Scenario Increased Modified V/C Modified V/C # Road Modified V C PCUs Ratio Grade 1. NH - 2 17 x 100%= 17 1096+17=1113 5,400 0.20 B Company has planned to undertake following mitigation measures for reducing impact:-  Regular water sprinkling will be done and all vehicle will be of valid PUC.  Imported Coal will be brought at port through Ship and from there to the plant site by road.  Pucca road exist upto NH # 2, which is at 0.3 kms from the plant site & same is capable of absorbing this additional vehicular traffic.  The high traffic congestion during peak hours only; hence the movement of trucks will be minimized in peak hours.  The commitment “Traffic movement will not be done in Peak hours” will be included in our policy.  All Truck drivers will be trained for the traffic rules and traffic movement. 4.5.4 Water Environment  Water required for the proposed expansion will be sourced from ADDA.  DRI Plant, SMS and Rolling Mill do not require any water for the manufacturing process. Water is required only for cooling purpose.  There is no wastewater discharge from the DRI Plant, as closed circuit cooling system will be followed.  There is no wastewater discharge from the Induction Furnace, as closed circuit cooling system will be followed.  Blow down of cooling towers will be taken to tank and reused for dust suppression in raw material unloading yard  There is no wastewater discharge from the Rolling Mill, as the contact cooling water will be recycled via descaling tanks.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 95

 Effluent generated from power plant (boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration, cooling tower blow down and plant washings) will be treated in ETP and utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning.  Sanitary wastewater will be treated in STP and treated water will be used for greenbelt development.  Storm water drains will be made along the plant boundary. Sedimentation pits will be provided along the storm water drains. The runoff will be discharged to nearby nalla. Garland drains will be provided along the raw material stock yard. The water will be collected in sedimentation tank, treated and then reused for dust suppression. Hence there will not be any impact on surrounding water bodies due to the proposed expansion project.

Table 4:23 Water Requirement Details Particulars Existing Expansion After Expansion (KLD) (KLD) (KLD) DRI Unit 135 135 270 Water for CPP -- 190 190 Billets Production -- 50 50 (Induction Furnace) Rolling Mill -- 50 50 Domestic-Use 6 8 14 Total 141 445 574

Figure 4.5 Water Balance Diagram

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 96

4.5.5 Soil Environment Table 4:24 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Noise Environment Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation  Soil contamination  Wastewater management facility (material supply) due to leakage/ with proper disposal facility will be  Raw spillage of raw provided. Material/Product material/untreated  Solid/hazardous waste generated Handling and water/hazardous from the process will be properly Storage waste. handled as per Solid Hazardous  Product  Leachate from the Waste Handling Rule. Manufacturing process wastewater  Domestic effluent will be treated in  Effluent/Sewage and waste handling STP. Discharge area may  Proposed greenbelt will provide  Solid/Hazardous contaminate the soil significantly help to protect the soil Waste Generation  Soil compaction due from erosion and contamination by  Greenbelt to movement of preventing the airborne dust to development heavy vehicles. travel to longer distances from the  Accidental spillage source. during manufacturing activity will contaminate the soil.

4.5.6 Noise Environment Table 4:25 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Noise Environment Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation  Noise generation  Valid PUC Certified vehicles will be (Materials Supply) due to vehicular used.  Raw movement,  All the equipment/machineries Material/Product operation of operated in the project will be Handling and machineries and designed/operated in such a way that Storage D.G. set. the noise level in work place will be  Product  Continuous noise minimal. Manufacturing may cause negative  Periodical noise monitoring will be  Greenbelt impact on workers carried out to ensure that ambient Development  Decreases the noise levels are restricted to  Recruitment efficiency of permissible limits. worker.  Total greenbelt (2.74 Ha) will be  Lake of developed in and around the plant. concentration  Provision of PPEs like  Positive impact due earmuffs/earplug to avoid effects of to Greenbelt. noise on occupational health of

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 97

workers as well as planning of working hours and shift of workers.  DG Set will be provided with acoustic enclosures and shall be used only in case of power failure/emergency.

4.5.7 Land Use/Land Cover Proposed expansion projects site falls in Mangalpur Industrial Area, where land is specially allotted for industrial development so the land use and land cover changes are inevitable hence there will be no impact on Land Use/Land Cover. 4.5.8 Hydrogeology Proposed expansion Projects falls in already developed Industrial Area, and water will be sourced from Asansol Durgapur Development Authority, Water Supply only so there will be no Impact on Hydrogeology. 4.5.9 Geology Proposed projects site falls in Mangalpur Industrial Area, so there will be no impact on Geology from the project. 4.5.10 Hazardous/Solid Waste Table 4:26 Impact due to Hazardous/Solid Waste and its Mitigation Measures Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Raw Material  Storage and  Collection, storage and disposal of /Product Handling handling of solid/hazardous waste will be carried out and Storage hazardous/ as per Hazardous and Other Wastes  Product solid wastes (Management and Trans Boundary Manufacturing will cause Movement) Rules, 2016.  Effluent/Sewage adverse impact  Used Oil will be collected and disposed- Discharge on health of off properly by selling it to registered  Solid/Hazardous the workers. recyclers. Waste Generation  Odor  DRI Char (36,000 TPA) will be used in  Recruitment generation CPP from waste  Ash/dust from DRI (15,000 TPA) will be storage area. used in civil construction purpose and Will be given to Brick manufacturers. Kiln accretion for road formation (600 TPA), SMS slag (24,000 TPA) will be crushed and iron will be recovered & remaining non-magnetic material will be inert nature and will be used as sub base material in road construction/ used for brick manufacturing/ civil construction

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 98

Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures works like PCC and wall construction, Mill Scale (15,00 TPA) from rolling mill will be given to ferro alloys industry, End cutting (3420 TPA) will be recycled in SMS unit and Ash from CPP (22,600 TPA) will be given to cement industries.

4.5.11 Ecology and Biodiversity Table 4:27 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Ecology & Biodiversity Ecolo Identifi Significanc Magnitud Durat Reversib Mitigation Cumulative impact gical ed e of Impact e ion/Ti ility criteri Impact ming/ a Frequ ency Zone Site No tree - - - - of Clearan felling influe ce required nce

No cumulative impact Ecologi Fugitive High Longe Reversibl Regular cal dust r time e water impact emission sprinkling is due to will reduce required to fugitive stomal avoid dust emissio index of emission. n existing Anti-smog trees/herbs gun is highly / shrubs recommende etc. d. The air- The high impact borne reduces to low respirable impact. dust surveys should be conducted. APTI will be done annual basis.

High Vehicular Moderate Longe Irreversib The vehicle Noise movement r time le with valid due to will cause PUC should vehicul hinderance be utilized, ar of animal proper traffic movement maintenance in the area. of trucks etc. should be done Moderate impact frequently, reduces to low. speed should be fixed 20-

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 99

30 km/hr in forest area, NO U TRUN & NO HORN policy should be followed in forest area/approa ch road. Adequate training should be provided. Animal Vehicular High During Irreversib Animal collisio traffic may Trans le Rescue Team ns due cause portati (ART) to animal on followed by transpo collision. Quick rtation Response Team (QRT) should be in High Impact reduces place. to low. Emergency numbers should be displayed along the approach road. Sign board with proper labeling should be displayed on the Roads. Zone Noise During shift Low Short Reversibl Silence zone of due to change; time e should influe worker celebration maintain nce s s, or any with low during religious pitch during shift occasions talk. No loud change create noisy speaker or environmen high noise t which will celebration No impact affect the allowed movement within of reptiles, premises. avifauna & other fauna.

4.5.12 Socio-Economic Table 4:28 Impact and Mitigation Measures on Socio-Economic Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 100

Project Activity Impact Mitigation Measures  Transportation  Beneficial to local  Local agencies will be appointed for (Materials Supply) transporters transportation of materials  Raw  Job opportunity to /machineries. Material/Product local villagers  The requirements of manpower for Handling and Storage  Positive impact due expansion (170 Nos.) will be met  Product to Greenbelt. from nearby villages. Manufacturing  The project will also help in  Greenbelt Area generation of significant indirect  Recruitment employment.

Table 4:29 Environmental Impact Assessment Matrix with Mitigation Measures (Operation Phase)

Parameters Environmental Attributes

Air

Soil

SHW

Total

Socio

Noise

Water LU/LC

Hydro

Geology Geology

Hazards

Risk and Risk Economic

Activities Ecology and Biodiversity Transportation and Utilities -4 - - -2 - - - -2 -6 -2 12 -4 Operation Product and Raw Material -4 -9 - -4 - - - - -4 -2 12 -11 Handling, Storage and Processing Manufacturing -4 -2 ------4 -4 - 12 -2 process Sewage and Effluent - -4 - -2 ------9 3 Generation Solid/ Hazardous ------2 -2 - - -4 Waste Disposal Green Belt 2 15 12 25 12 - - - - 25 9 123 Development 5 Recruitment - -2 ------2 - - 12 8 Total 13 -2 12 17 12 0 0 -10 -16 21 66 113 Total Cumulative Score for various Environmental Parameters with mitigation measures is 113 which has No appreciable Beneficial Impact / Adverse Impact 4.6 SUMMARY Impacts on land environment, air environment, water environment, noise environment, biological environment, socioeconomic environment and risk and hazard has been identified and mitigation measures for the same for both construction and operation phase are

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 101

suggested. The maximum incremental GLC of PM10, SO2 and NOx from the project will be 3.6 g/m3, 4.7 g/m3 and 3.2 g/m3 respectively. The maximum glc values are occurring at a distance of 0.5 to 1 km area towards the southwest direction of ARP (DRI ESP stack). The ambient air quality will remain within the prescribed standards. The resultant concentrations are within the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS). Wastewater generated from the project will be treated and reused within the plant. No wastewater will be discharged outside the plant boundary (during non-monsoon). Solid wastes will be given for utilization. No solid wastes will be dumped inside or outside the plant premises. From the overall study and evaluation of impacts, it can be concluded that the overall negative impacts from various activities on different environmental parameters is negligible with proper EMP in place. ------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 102

CHAPTER-5 : ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVE (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)

5.1 ALTERNATIVE SITE The project expansion will be done in Mangalpur – Industrial Area as per State Government, WB. 100% land is in the procession of Company, The expansion project is forward integration. Approach road and other infrastructure facilities are already available at this location. Hence no alternative sites have been considered for the proposed expansion. 5.2 ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGY Conventional technology, that are tested under Indian conditions, has been selected for all the units and pollution control systems. EPC and operating personnel are available in the country. National emission / discharge standards and operating guidelines are available for all the selected technologies. The selected technologies are suitable to ensure compliance with applicable discharge standards. Iron and steel making: Iron ore lumps, coal and dolomite will be used for making sponge iron in DRI rotary kiln. Making sponge iron using DRI Kiln is a conventional technology. The productivity and quality of sponge iron will be enhanced by using low ash imported coal The waste material, namely dolochar, contains moderate GCV and low ash. It is mixed with coal and used as fuel in AFBC Boilers for power generation. The exhaust heat coming out of Kiln will be passed through heat exchanger to extract the heat (called Waste Heat Recovery Boilers) and used it to make steam and run turbines to generate electricity. DRI Kiln technology for making iron from iron ore is inferior compared to Blast Furnace technology, in terms of yield and quality, Nevertheless, DRI Kiln is preferred by small industrialists because it is available in a variety of small sizes, can use indigenous bituminous coal (coke is required for blast furnace, which is mainly imported due to lack of coking coal availability in India), the cost of production is low and sponge iron is suitable for use in induction furnace for billet making. SMS: Scrap is melted in Induction Furnace, and hot sponge iron is directly charged for utilizing the available intrinsic heat. Pig iron is added to make steel. Steel is converted to billets using continuous casting machine. Billets is used in rolling mill to make TMT Bars and wire rods. The alternate technology available is Electric Arc Furnace or Basic Oxygen Furnace, which are suited for large sized iron and steel plant and costly. Power Generation: AFBC technology has been chosen for power plant because it is available in small size (7 MW), it can use coal having low calorific value, operate on low pressure and generates low NOx due to low combustion temperature (max 900oC). Due to presence of 70% dolochar in fuel (dolochar is highly alkaline in nature, have less than 0.1% sulphur), the SO2 is converted in situ to sulphates. However, the energy efficiency of AFBC is less compared to normal pulverized fuel boilers, CFBC boilers and supercritical boilers

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 103

5.3 SUMMARY No alternative site was considered for the proposed expansion project. Mangalpur Industrial Estate is a well-developed Industrial Area having necessary infrastructure facilities. A part from this, no Ecologically Sensitive, no National Park, no Wild Life Sanctuary, no Biosphere Reserve, no Reserved and no Protected Forests are present within the Study Area.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 104

CHAPTER-6 : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM

6.0 TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF MONITORING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF MITIGATION MEASURES (INCLUDING MEASUREMENT METHODOLOGIES, FREQUENCY, LOCATION, DATA ANALYSIS, REPORTING SCHEDULES, EMERGENCY PROCEDURES, DETAILED BUDGET & PROCUREMENT SCHEDULES). To know the effectiveness of environmental mitigation measures post project environmental monitoring program will be strictly followed as per the statutory requirement. 6.1 MEASUREMENT METHODOLOGY, ATTRIBUTES AND IT’S MONITORING FREQUENCY. S.No. Particulars Frequency of Duration of Parameters required Monitoring sampling to be monitored 1. Water & Waste water quality A. Ground Water Once in a month Grab As per IS: 10500 quality in the area. sampling B. Effluent at the inlet Once in a month composite As per EPA Rules, 1996 & outlet of the ETP. sampling (24 (pH, TDS, TSS, Temp, hourly) COD, O&G, Fe, Cr. Pb, Ni, As. C. Sanitary Twice in a month Composite As per EPA Rules, 1996 Wastewater (inlet & sampling (pH, TSS, BOD, COD, Free outlet of STP) Chlorine, ammonia, oil & grease, Coliform count) 2. Air Quality A. Stack Monitoring CEMS (real time, -- PM2.5, PM10, SO2 & NOx DRI Kiln/ESP/ online) WHRB SMS stack B. Ambient Air Quality CAAQMS (real 24 hours, PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and at plant boundary time, online data continuous NOx and CO (Admin building) transmitted to CPCB & SPCS servers) C Ambient Air Quality Twice a weekly 24 hours, PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and Outside the plant monitoring using continuous NOx and CO boundary High Volume (NE, SW and W samplers direction, 1km away from plant boundary)

C. Fugitive emissions Twice in a month 24 hours PM2.5 and PM10

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 105

(Process area and 20 m unwind of the RMH Yard) source and downwind of source (raw material unloading, slag crushing, etc) 4. Noise level monitoring Ambient Noise Once in a month 24 hours Noise levels dBA (Leq) levels at 4 sides of plant boundary All the parameters will be analyzed as per IS/CPCB procedures specified for those parameters. REPORTING Analysis Reports shall be submitted to WBPCB, CPCB and Regional Office of MOEFCC, every six months. Compliance report of the conditions stipulated in EC shall be also submitted to the Regional Office of MOEFCC and CPCB, every six months. The CAAQMS data shall be displayed at Plant Gate. 6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL In order to implement the environmental management program efficiently within the organization, periodical monitoring as per statutory guidelines and midcourse corrections/actions, if required based on the environmental monitoring results, management intends to established environmental cell for successful implementation. The roles & responsibilities are clearly defined among the personnel within the environmental cell. 6.2.1 Responsibilities for Environmental Management Cell (EMC) The responsibilities of the EMC include the following:  Environmental Monitoring of the surrounding area.  Green belt development and inventory of flora  Ensuring minimal use of water.  Proper implementation of pollution control measures.  Access the risk area, Implementation of QMS.  Conducting Internal Audits.  Closing of NCs and conduction Management Review Meetings.  Implementation of control and protective measures.  Coordination for environment related activities within the project as well as with outside agencies.  Collection statistics for workers health.  Green belt development and inventory of flora  Monitoring the progress of implementation of environmental management programme  Ambient noise, Air, Water, Soil monitoring.  Management of drainage system, dumps, reclamation and restoration etc.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 106

The cell will responsible for monitoring of the mine environment related requirements which include: Interaction with the State pollution Control Board EMC shall be in regular touch with WBPCB and shall send them environmental monitoring reports regularly in the prescribed format, as per the prevailing practice. Any new regulations considered by State/Central Pollution Control Board for the proposed project shall be taken care of by EMC. 6.3 REPORTING SCHEDULE  MOEFCC registered agency will be retained to generate the environment quality data in respect of air, water, noise, soil and prepare the report.  Submitting environmental monitoring report to WBPCB. The cell will also take mitigative or corrective measures as required or suggested by the Board.  Timely renewal of Consents & Authorization will be taken care of.  Conduct and submit annual Environmental Statement to WBPCB in Form V  Prepare and submit six monthly report on the compliance with the conditions of the environmental clearance and submit to the Regional Office of MoEFCC.  Comply with the conditions prescribed under the Consents and Authorization  Keeping the management updated on regular basis about the findings / results of monitoring activities and proposes measures to improve environmental performance.  Conducting regular safety drills and training programs to educate employees on safety practices. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be responsible for the identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advise on corrective actions, organize training programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health.  Conducting safety and health audits to ensure that recommended safety and health measures are followed. 6.4 BUDGET AND PROCUREMENT SCHEDULE Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS) for all Stacks will be provided. However, a third party also will be engaged to monitor all the environmental parameters as per CPCB/SPCB norms once the expansion project comes into operation. The budgetary allocation for Environmental monitoring is approx. Rs. 25.50 Lakhs/Annum. Table 6:1 Cost of Environmental Monitoring Program S.No. Monitoring No. of Monitoring Frequency No. of Total cost in Item points Parameters of Samples (Rs. In lakhs) (Proposed) Monitoring /annum 1 AAQ (at 1 PM2.5, PM10 Continuous - 15,00,000 Admin Bldg) SO2, NOx & CO CAAQMS

2 AAQ 3 PM2.5, PM10 Twice a 288 6,00,000 (manual, SO2, NOx & CO week outside

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 107

plant)

3 Effluent 4 pH, TDS, TSS, Once in a 48 2,50,000 (STP and O&G, Free month ETP) Available Cl, Cu, Fe, Zn, Chromium, PO4 4 Fugitive 2 PM2.5 and Twice in a 48 1,00,000 Emissions PM10 month using HVS 5 Ground 1 As per IS: 10500 Once in a 12 1,00,000 water month 6 Noise levels 6 CPCB- day and Once in a 72 50,00 night time at month plant boundary (hourly) and nearest habitations Total 25,50,000

6.5 SUMMARY In order to maintain the environmental quality within the stipulated standards, regular monitoring of various environmental components is necessary which will be complied as per conditions. For this project M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt Ltd has taken decision and constitutes an Environmental Management Cell and committed to operate the proposed project with the objectives mentioned in approved Environment Policy. EMP may also require measurement of ambient environmental quality in the vicinity of the site using ecological/biological, physical and chemical indicators. Monitoring may include socio- economic interaction, through local liaison activities or even assessment of complaints. Regular Monitoring of all the environmental parameters viz., air, water, noise and soil as per the formulated program based on CPCB, SPCB and MoEF&CC guidelines will be carried out every year.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 108

CHAPTER-7 : ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 INTRODUCTION As per the Terms of Reference (ToR’s) issued vide letter F.No.J-11011/253/2020-IA.II (I) dated 26th October., 2020 by MoEF&CC, New Delhi, following Additional Studies required to be carried out for the proposed expansion project.  Public consultation/Public Hearing;  Hazard Identification and Risk Management; and  Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan. 7.2 PUBLIC CONSULTATION The Public notice for public hearing was advertised in newspaper of Times of India, Raniganj Edition on 04.12.2019 by WBPCB for general information regarding Environmental Clearance of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1,20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal. Public Hearing was held on 05.01.2021 at Muralidhar Bhawan, NSB Road, Near Anjana Cinema, Raniganj, WB. Mr. Apratim Ghosh, Additional District Magistrate, Paschim Bardhaman, chaired the public hearing. In addition to Mr. Apratim Ghosh Public Hearing was attended by following representatives of the different departments:-  Sh. Swarup Kumar Mandal, Senior Environmental Engineer, WBPCB  Sh Anjan Kr Fauzdar, Assistant Environmental Engineer, WBPCB The proceedings of the Public Hearing have been forwarded to Secretary MOEF&CC by WBPCB. A copy of the proceedings is attached as Annexure-V.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 109

Figure 7.1 Public Hearing Photographs

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 110

Figure 7.2 Public Hearing Photographs

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 111

7.2.1 Action Plan for Commitments Raised During Public Hearing

S. Name & Village Issues Raised Commitment by Project Proponent Time Schedule with No of Participant Plan of Action 1 Sri. Sunil Bhagat Asked about the Project proponent stated that No water is required in the sponge of Bhagat Para, water pollution iron and steel manufacturing process. Raniganj. control measures to  Water will be used only for cooling purpose and will be be taken by the recycled in the process and there will not be any discharge 2021-2022 project proponent of the waste water outside the project premises. Sanitary during the operation wastewater will be treated STP. Overall plant will be based

and construction on zero effluent discharge scheme.

phase of the  Project Proponent also stated that they always prefer to Proposed expansion provide employment to local people. project and  The job and they will be required to submit the application employment to company and selection will be made on the basis of PP will also generation. candidate eligibility and qualification. approach the district Employment Exchange office also will publish the advertisement in newspaper and obtain the CVs of eligible local people for training and job opportunity. (2021-22)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 112

S. Name & Village Issues Raised Commitment by Project Proponent Time Schedule with No of Participant Plan of Action 2 Sri. Jico He welcomed the  Project Proponent replied that Regarding financial aid  Not relevant Banerjee of project and stated during the festival Season Project Proponent stated that with project and Punjabi More, that the government Company is being in existence since last many years and we will provide Raniganj. is keen in industrial had already contributed in Durga Pooja and Kali Pooja in the financial help development of the past and performed their part. He also assured to provide as per the state. He also financial support in the best possible way after the company policy. requested the expansion of the said expansion project during the festival  Every Year for project proponent to season in future. next three year provide financial assistance during the Durga Puja, Kali Puja and other cultural activities in the local area. 3 Sri. Sanjeev Giri He raised his  Project Proponent stated that regarding Priority to local Already covered in of Rambagan, concern of the peoples for the job opportunity Project Proponent replied Point No-1 Raniganj. unemployment in that many of workers are from local villages only who are the area due to currently working in the existing Covid-19 pandemic  Project and also stated that for the future expansion we are and also requested liable to give priority to the Local residents for the job project proponent to opportunity. They can apply and V:e will provide them give preference to  Opportunities as per the company policy. local people over the other in terms of the job opportunity

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 113

S. Name & Village Issues Raised Commitment by Project Proponent Time Schedule with No of Participant Plan of Action from the proposed expansion project. 4 Ms. Ranu Tappa He welcomed the PP stated that Regarding updation of medical facility in the area Project Proponent of Egara Gram, project. She raised and ambulance services. Project Proponent replied that at present will contact the Area Raniganj. his concern about there is Ambulance service and it is already available in the CMO for medical the medical facility project premises which may be utilized by the local inmates as per help under the in the areas and also their requirements and in future as a part of CSR activity they will company CER policy requested project try to upgrade the medical facilities in the nearby villages with the and will provide the proponent to mutual consent of the local authorities. financial assistance provide the to upgrade the ambulance service medical facility in to nearby village. the area.

(2022-2023) 5 Ms. Anima Das He requested that Project Proponent stated that Regarding the unemployment due We will contact to of Sisu Bagan, the Project to Covid-19 pandemic and financial aid to children for the sarpach of nearby Raniganj Proponent for the Education. Project Proponent assured that necessary facilities will villages and will financial help be provided to the Children. As part of CER activity, they will obtain the list of in terms of the distribute books, school bags and other necessary items to the childrens, who medical, jobs, nearby schools and as already assured that priority will be given requires financial education facility for to the local people for the jobs in future. assistance. their Children and We will contact to migrate government schools people/labor from of nearby villages for

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 114

S. Name & Village Issues Raised Commitment by Project Proponent Time Schedule with No of Participant Plan of Action other states in the distribution of books nearby village who etc. all have lost their living hood due to (2022-2023) pandemic crises around the country. 6 Sri. Sukumar He requested that Project Proponent assured that Regarding repair of existing road 2022-2023 Hembram of the Project Project Proponent stated that fulfilling this demand is not in our Baktarnagar, Proponent regarding scope. Bandanga. the repairing work Under the purview of the Project Proponent. However, after to be done for discussing with the local authority they will. Repair/ construct the existing road in required works under the CER activities by the nearby villages as Company. during rainy seasons people faces many problems for their daily routine work. 7 Sri. Dikesh He welcomed the Project Proponent stated that regarding the CER activity, as per We will provide the Singh of College expansion project. the applicable norms CER budget shall be allocated as per the budget as per the Para, Raniganj. He asked about the need of the surrounding villages and focus area will be education government norms. detailed CER plan by & capacity building, sustainable livelihood, agricultural & land project proponent development, women empowerment & income generation, (2022-2024) for the development natural resource management & watershed development and of "the vicinity area other social services.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 115

S. Name & Village Issues Raised Commitment by Project Proponent Time Schedule with No of Participant Plan of Action of the project. 8 Sri. Koushik He welcomed the PP stated that regarding overall benefits of the projects to the Already covered in Mukherjee of expansion project. nearby area : Project Proponent stated that Project will provide point No-1. Kumar Bazar, He also Direct Employment & Indirect Employment to about 50-70 people Raniganj. expressed his on daily wages basis during the construction stage. There are 130 gratitude towards person employed in the existing unit for the various job categories the Project and in the proposed expansion project, about 170 person are Proponent for their expected to be employed during operational phase, for the skilled, contribution in semi-skilled and unskilled category. various areas Relating to socio- economic activities and asked about the project benefits to the local people. 9 Sri. Nirmal Pal He raised his Project Proponent stated that plant is in operation since 2002 ESPs will be of Baktarnagar concern about the onwards, they are keeping air pollution under control. The Project provided to DRI Gram, Raniganj air pollution to the Proponent assured that in the proposed expansion project, best Kilns to bring down vicinity area, where available technology shall be adopted to control the dust emission the particulate many adhiwasi and stack height will be as per the CPCB/SPCB norms. Fume emission to less than families are already Extraction System, ducts and Bag Filter, ESP will be installed. 30 mg/Nm3. living and measures Vehicles used during operation phase comply with the applicable ESP will be provided to be taken for pollution control norms and should mandatorily have the PUC to Power plant to control of air certificates and adequate trees would be planted inside the plant bring down the

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 116

S. Name & Village Issues Raised Commitment by Project Proponent Time Schedule with No of Participant Plan of Action pollution. He also premises as per statutory guild lines. particulate emission suggested that the to less than 30 green belt should be mg/Nm3. de eloped at the Fume Extraction & maximum possible Cleaning system extent and the same with bag filters will should be be provided to SMS maintained. Units to bring down the particulate matter emission to less than 30 mg/Nm3. 10 Sri. Makar He welcomed the Project Proponent stated that already it is discussed in details and --- Mandal of expansion project. they will follow all regulatory compliance to keep air pollution Mangalpur He raised his under control. Gram, Raniganj. concern about the pollution and how the project proponent will control the air pollution and water pollution and also asked about the detail of equipment to be installed to

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 117

S. Name & Village Issues Raised Commitment by Project Proponent Time Schedule with No of Participant Plan of Action control all type of pollution during the operation of the project

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 118

7.3 RISK ASSESSMENT The Hazard Identification & Risk Assessment (HIRA) approach comprises following steps:  Hazard Identification: Identification of events that could lead to accidents by studying the process; examination of layout plan and the PI Diagram.  Risk Assessment: Risk Assessment is done through consequence analysis to know the type of damage that any accident could pose on the human beings and property. Based on the extent of damage, risk mitigation measures are suggested. In order to manage the hazard, on-site risk management plan is prepared. The on-site risk management plan is also known as Disaster Management Plan. Off-site risk management plan is prepared if the consequence analysis predicts the possibility of risks to people and property present within the damage zone. 7.3.1 Environmental & Public Receptors The project is located in industrial area. No industry school, hospital, jail, commercial complex, community center, etc are present within 500 m radius of the project boundary. East – Industry West – Industry North – Industry South – Vacant land 7.3.2 Hazard Identification & Consequence Analysis The approach followed for Risk Analysis Study is in accordance with CPCB document titled "Environmental Risk Analysis due to Handling and Storage of Hazardous Chemicals" has been also referred. The hazards were identified by studying the PI diagram and shown in following Tables.

Table 7:1 Possible Risks From The Steel Plant & Mitigation Measures Equipment Process Potential Safety checks and Mitigation measures Hazard POWER PLANT Coal storage Storage of Fire Coal storage yard will be sprinkled with water shed coal for to keep it moist. 10 days Coal Coal Fire Smoke /heat/Fire detection system handling processin Water sprinkling arrangement bunkers, g Automatic modular fire extinguisher with pulverizers electronic actuator, Portable CO2 fire extinguishers Boiler Fuel Fire Pressure and temperature detectors with auto burning Explosion release values placed on each boiler. to O2, CO2 and CO- real time monitors, online, produce continuous with alarm systems

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 119

steam Automatic fire suppression system- activated upon melting of the fuse-able link will activate the system, allowing extinguishable chemicals to flow from the tanks to each extinguishing nozzles. CO2 fire extinguishers, Dry powder fire extinguishers, Generator Convert Mechanical & Layout of Equipment / Machinery will be in Mechanic Fire Hazards accordance to factory inspector norms. al energy Lube Oil Equipment of BIS specifications into System electrical Cable energy galleries Short circuits Noise Acoustic enclosure Use of ear muffs/ ear plugs Isolated panel rooms Special foundation with vibration absorbers Power --- Fire and Fire extinguishers will be placed at strategic Transformer explosion locations s Automatic modular fire extinguisher with electronic actuator, CO2 fire extinguishers, The area will be isolated with fencing and restricted entry. Switch Yard Transfor Fire All electrical fittings and cables of BIS mer, specifications. Cable Heat/Smoke/Fire detectors placed at strategic galleries locations Automatic modular fire extinguisher with electronic actuator, CO2 fire extinguishers, Compressor Plant Governor The design precautions of safety will be House operation failure due to followed in manufacture and erection of the failure of compressors. pins and springs leading to opening of safety valves STG, draft Noise High Noise Acoustic enclosures will be provided. fans, soot generated Control panel room will be acoustically blowing due to insulated. from boiler, operation Administrative controls by use of earmuffs/ear

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 120

ventilation of STG, plugs at work area having excessive noise pipes working Enclose ID fans, insulating ventilation pipes of fans, Use of dampeners ventilatio Solid vibration free foundations. n system, DRI Plant Coal storage Fire Burns Water sprinkling system to keep the coal moist yard, day CO2 fire extinguishers and Dry powder fire bins extinguishers Sponge Iron Reductio falling of Hot Before opening the kiln bottom door, first clean Kiln n of Iron materials, the inner surface of the stack cap, such that the Ore injury, burns dust particle and hard clinkers which deposited in the cap is fallen into the DSC. Before opening the DSC bottom door check the DSC bar position and condition and clean it if big block of castables or any hard clinkers which is blocking the dust flow passage to scrapper chute. Clean the dust by opening the man hole provided in the chute and check the spiking rods and the screen. Allow the scrapper to run to remove the muck, then open the drain pipe of the scrapper, which is located at bottom on either side, pour sufficient water to clean the sludge and the slurry dust to flow through drain pipe. Ensure to stop the scrapper and open the top plate to check the alignment, wear and tear of the plates and take necessary precaution against the excessive worn out plate. Cooler Fall of hot Burns if the Use of PPE by workers discharge DRI and materials Water shower, eye wash, first aid box char comes in contact Magnetic Separatio Burns, if the Use of PPE by workers separator n of Hot material Water shower, eye wash, first aid box DRI and comes in Char contact INDUCTION FURNACE Induction Melt solid Re-circulating Use of PPE by workers Furnaces charge water may Water shower, eye wash, first aid box and CCM into come in

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 121

liquid contact with steel molten steel leading to spurting of metal Lifting of Lifting Spurting of Administrative control and use of PPEs crucible & and molten steel Selection of equipment meeting BIS specs Laddle by tilting Routine repair and maintenance EPT cranes No operating person is allowed at this place during crane operation. RE-HEATING FURNACE Mills Changing Burns, on Administrative control and use of PPEs the shape contact with Selection of equipment meeting BIS specs of billets hot rolled Routine repair and maintenance products

Table 7:2 Process Hazard Analysis Related To Induction Furnace & Necessary Risk Control Measures Sl. Area/Section Hazards Risk Control Measures No A) ELECTRIC INDUCTION FURNACE 1) IF proper Explosion hazard due to  Stop operation. water leakage from water  Stop tilting or stop any cooled furnace or electrical crucible movement cables/panels.  Identify the leakage point  Follow SOP for rectification Metal splash due to water  Stop operation. coming into contact with  No unauthorized person on molten metal. (Water may furnace platform be present in scrap material or from leaks in the furnace cooling systems) Metal splash due to  Stop operation improper scrap charging /  Proper segregation of scrap wet scrap / chemicals in  Safe scrap charging scrap. through cranes/vibrators charging trolley  Use of hydraulic pusher for melting Injury from Material  Regular Maintenance of EOT Handling like DRI, Pig Iron, cranes in respect of wire Scrap shifting to furnace ropes, brakes, lifting hook, floor. rails/wheels, electrical

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 122

system/motors etc.  Provision of proper limit switches  Emergency main switch of cranes to be provided near platform or at an easily accessible place.  Bell/Siren is to be provided in the cabin for crane operator  Annual inspection of Cranes/Lifting tackles/ Magnets by competent person every year as per Factories Act  Display of safe working load on each crane  Proper Guarding of all stairs and crane’s CT Trolley Explosion due to high Water temperature & water flow temperature / thinning of sensors refractory liner Circuit breakers (use of ELCB) and Bridging in IF: Leading to tripping mechanism superheating of furnace Current frequency monitoring bottom and erosion of device-real time ramming mass and rupture Lining conditions of crucibles & ladle of cooling water tubes. etc - check. Develop and follow SOP 2 Accidents Person hit by moving Siren, gong bell during machines. movement machines. Permit to work prior to undertaking any maintenance job 3) Electrical Electrical failures and shock Proper Earthing pits. system Earthing of all electrical motors/gadgets. Work permit system. Transformer testing (dielectric strength and dehydration of Transformer oil).

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 123

Table 7:3 Process Hazard Analysis Related To Rolling Mills & Necessary Risk Control Measures SL. No Area/Section Hazards Risk Control Measures A Material Injury in grinding  Wear goggles for all grinding section operation machine operations.  Operate grinding wheels at recommended speed with recommended depth of cut.  Use proper wheel guards on all grinding machines.  Use PPEs.  Develop and Follow SOPs Hazards due to  Avoid sitting, standing, or walking conveyors on conveyors.  All conveyor to be provided with proper guards.  Never perform maintenance while a conveyor is operation.  Ensure correct operation of conveyor controls.  Avoid loose clothing, long hair, jewellery and other loose items near conveyor Emergency "shut-off" devices to be provided.  Follow lock-out / tag-out procedures for maintenance.  Only authorized / trained personnel to operate or maintain the conveyor. Hazards in  Maintained floors in proper Material condition. handling &  Stacked the material properly stacking area without any billet ends protruding out.  Clearly defined walkways, proper stacking of material.  Regular clearance of debris.  Develop and Follow SOP. RHF & Rolling Mill Use of Fire hazards  Place smoke/Heat/HC detectors at Methane gas strategic locations  Give clearance for cutting / welding etc. after ensuring that there is no leakage of gas.  Deploy portable fire extinguishers at strategic points  While lighting up or off of the furnace, laid down procedures are to be followed.  Develop and Follow SOP.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 124

Burn injury  Use personal protection equipment. hazards,  Keep the first aid kit having burn Exposure to hot injury medicine on standby. flames and hot  Follow job rotation billets  Develop and Follow SOP. Heat stress Hazard due to  All electrical equipment/ machines mechanical to be earthed properly. & Electrical  Use electrical PPEs. Maintenance  Develop and Follow SOP. C Rolling Mill Injury from  Shutdown / permit to work with moving roller electrical isolation. table  No work to be done on conveyor in running condition.  Local emergency switch to be operated for approaching conveyor.  Availability of pull chord.  Siren system prior to restarting conveyor.  Prohibit coming with loose fitted cloths.  Area barricading if material is removed from height.  Develop and Follow SOP. Injury from  Coupling guards to be in place. Rotating  Loose cloths to prohibited machineries  Develop and Follow SOP Injury during  Permit to work" practice to be Working on mill followed strictly. stands  Display of “Men at Work board is to be done at Operator Control Panel.  Develop and Follow SOP. Injury during Roll  During Roll Change, Rolls to be Change cooled with water spray before work to avoid burn injury.  Ensure to take Power Shutdown for Roller Table and connected drive.  Ensure written Work Clearance to be given to concerned personnel for doing the work.  Cleanliness of area with respect to presence of oil, grease, jute and other inflammable materials before gas cutting/ welding job.  Availability of fire hydrant to be ensured  if job involves gas cutting etc.  Display “Men at Work” board at Operator

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 125

 Control Panel.  Place a plate on rollers table for smooth entry of personnel.  Use required PPE when changing roll and after completion of jobs, ensure that men and materials are removed from site.  Ensure that “Job completion Report” is given in writing and then cancel “Power Shutdown,” remove “Caution Tags” and give clearance for operation.  Develop and Follow SOP. Electric shock  Ensures safety precautions like “Power Shutdown”, work clearance before stating the job.  Displaying of "Men at Work" at HT switching on panel.  Proper earthing of brush holder arm etc.  Checking protection and safety devices may expose the maintainer to risks in the event that the devices are not functional.  For this reason, the machines must be isolated from their main power sources (electrical switchboards, main delivery valves, etc.) under the supervision of the Manager of the plant, using established SOP’s and written permissions.  Develop and Follow SOP Entanglement/  For working in gear box / coupling, injury at Gear take power shut-down for box/ coupling connected drive.  Display “Men at Work tag”.  Develop and Follow SOP Injury while  For safe working, ensure” power Working on Shut down” Work clearance Men at EOT Cranes work tag.  Watch by additional person to observe movement of nearby crane etc.  Stoppers are to be welded on both sides of crane on LT rails.  Submit job completion report after repair.  All the lifting tools and tackles to be checked every year as per statutory

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 126

requirement.  Develop and Follow SOP Injury in Motors  Provide guards on all the motors with having belt / chain type belt/chain drives transmission mechanism. Injury with  Develop and Follow SOP Flywheel  Flywheel to run below safe speed limits.  Appropriate guard to be provided around flywheel.  Develop and Follow SOP Person hit by  Auto Announcement during Proper rolling hot guards to be provided to avoid material during material coming in the way of looping and play workmen.  Proper pathways to be provided for safe movement.  Use of appropriate PPE hand gloves, gum boots, Face shield, dust mask, goggles by persons working on stands and handling hot materials.  Proper leg / arms guards / safety goggles to be provided to tongs men Permit to work prior to undertaking any maintenance job.  Develop and Follow SOP. Injury from  Appropriate guards to be provided Cooling Fans around fan blades.  Proper stand to be provided.  Earthing to be provided.  Develop and Follow SOP Injury from  Use appropriate lifting tackles like Manual chain pulley block, hoist etc to lift Handling of heavy parts. Heavy loads  Develop and Follow SOP. Injury from  All hand tools to be well designed, Handling of frequently inspected and well stock at stands maintained.  Rivets of tongs used at mills to be renewed frequently.  Develop and Follow SOP.

7.3.3 Hazard Assessment Fire in coal yard: Fire can happen if some source of ignition accidently gets in contact with the coal. The consequence of fire is moderate. Since such incident takes sufficient time to get widespread, enough response time is available for plant personnel to get away to safer distance. No on-site risk is involved. Water sprinklers connected to water reservoir is sufficient to control the fire.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 127

Fire in fuel oil tank: Due to leakage in pipes or spillage during handling, the diesel may spill and form a pool. Upon ignition the pool may result in pool fire. All specifications of OISD will be followed to prevent and control the risk. Elaborate fire fighting measures consisting of water sprinklers and foam spray, fire extinguishers will be provided near the oil tank. Burn injury: Handling of hot sponge iron and char, tapping of hot metal and spreading of slag create the possibility of burn injury to the operating personal. There is on-site risk. Use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) like specially insulated rubber gloves, tight goggles, helmets, face shields, rubber aprons, safety shoe with non-skid soles and toe protection will be adequate to prevent the accidents. In case of such injury, immediate first aid treatment by paramedical /trained staff should be provided. Bath showers (2-3) and eye wash shower (2- 3) connected to a water tank (5000 L) should be kept at the washroom. In case of severe burns, the affected personnel should be immediately taken to nearby Hospital. Management should tie up with a good Hospital so that its facility could be availed without any hassles. Mechanical injury to body parts: Mechanical injury to body parts of operating personnel can happen due to negligence. On-site risk is involved. Use of Personal Protective Equipment like specially gloves, goggles, helmet, face shield (if required), safety belt (if required), UV protection goggles (if required), aprons, safety shoe with non-skid soles and toe protection will be adequate to prevent the injury. In case of such injury, immediate first aid treatment by paramedical /trained staff should be provided. In case of severe burns, the affected personnel should be immediately taken to nearby Hospital. Management should tie up with a good Hospital so that its facility could be availed without any hassles. Electrical Shock: It can happen to any personnel due to faulty installation of electrical devices and equipment or due to poor quality of equipment or poor O&M practices. Risk could be minimized by adopting all safety codes prescribed by the BIS. Off-site risk is not involved. 7.3.4 General Risk Mitigation Measures i. All safety and health codes prescribed by the BIS will be implemented through the Integrated Management System. ii. Safety data sheets of the chemicals will be displayed at specific locations (near the storage and handling areas). iii. Following process aspects should be considered: High temperature pressure alarms, back up indicators, annunciate panel, and process control through PLC, single loop controls, interlocks, etc. iv. Fire hydrants will be located at all convenient points along the major drains and checked for water availability on regular basis. v. Fire extinguishing equipment, sand buckets, water sprinklers and water hoses will be provided at all convenient point. vi. Fire Fighting System: Effective measures have been considered to minimise fire hazard. Fire protection is proposed through hydrant and sprinkler system, designed as per the recommendation of Tariff Advisory Committee of Insurance Association of India. vii. The following areas are mainly susceptible to fire:  Cable Galleries.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 128

 Electrical switchgear / MCC room.  Coal handling area, conveyors, transfer points, tunnels and storage yard.  Transformers and oil drums viii. For containment of fire and preventing it from spreading in cable galleries, section wise fire barriers with self-closing fire resistant doors will be provided. ix. The ventilation systems provided in cable galleries will be interlocked with the fire alarm system, so that in the event of a fire, the ventilation system gets automatically switched off. x. In order to avoid spreading of fire, all cable entries/openings in cable galleries, tunnels, channels, floors, barriers etc. will be sealed with non-inflammable/ fire resistant sealing materials. xi. Fire hydrant points will be provided throughout the premises. Medium velocity spray system will be provided for protection of transformers, cable galleries, fuel oil and turbine oil storage tanks and coal conveyor galleries. Water for hydrant, spray and sprinkler systems will be supplied from the fire water pumps located in fire water pump house adjacent to cooling water pond. The hydrant system is designed as an ordinary hazard class. Portable fire extinguishers are provided at strategic locations throughout the plant. xii. Fire detection and alarm system will be provided to detect fire/smoke in vulnerable areas of the plant through smoke / heat detectors. Fire, heat, smoke and hydrocarbon detection alarms will be installed. xiii. For detection and protection of the plant against fire hazard, any one or a combination of the following systems will protect susceptible areas:  Hydrant system  Medium velocity spray system  Portable fire extinguishers  Fire alarm system ix. Following PPE’s are recommended for use by workers (job specific) a. Self rescue type gas filters (with oxygen cylinder or compressed air) b. Mechanical filters c. Fire proximity suits, asbestos aprons or aluminized asbestos suits) d. Safety helmets e. Face shields (Asbestos or PVC) f. Petromax lamp/Torches g. Axes/hand saw h. Fire entry suits i. Fire blankets j. Gloves (PVC, asbestos, special rubber make) k. Ropes l. Ladders m. Rubber glove (tested upto 25000 volt.) n. Blanket o. Rubber sole shoes and gum boots

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 129

p. Safety shoes with toe protection q. Shoes with non-skid soles r. Safety belt with life line (leather, hard rubber or neoprene) 7.3.5 Fire Protection System The following Fire Protection system will be provided in the plant.  Hydrant system covering the entire plant including all important auxiliaries and buildings. The system will be complete with piping, valves, instrumentation, hoses, nozzles and hydrants, etc;  Sprinkler system for cable galleries/vaults/spreader room etc;  Portable fire extinguishers such as pressurized water type, carbon dioxide type and foam type will be located at strategic locations throughout the plant; and  Modular type carbon dioxide panel injection fire extinguishing system will be provided in control equipment room, cable space below control room and at other unmanned electrical and electronic equipment room. The following pumps will be provided in the fire protection system. Fire Water Pumps:  AC motor driven fire water pumps for hydrant, medium velocity water spray system and foam system.  AC motor driven fire water pumps for high velocity water spray system.  Diesel engine driven pump as stand by for the above.  AC motor driven Jockey pump 1 No. for maintaining pressure. Suitable number of electric motor driven and diesel engine operated hydrant and spray pumps with automatic starting will be provided for the above systems. The fire water pumps will take suction from the fire water reservoir to be created in the plant area. 7.4 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN 7.4.1 Disasters A disaster is catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people are plunged into helplessness and suffering and as a result need protection, clothing, shelter, medical and social care and other necessities of life. Disasters can be divided into two main groups. The first group includes those disasters which result from natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, cyclones, tropical storms, floods, avalanches, landslides etc. The second group includes disastrous events occasioned by humans, or by their impact upon the environment. Examples are industrial accidents, radiation accidents, factory fires, explosions, escape of toxic gases or chemical substances from an industrial unit, river pollution, mining or other structural collapses; air, sea, rail and road transport accidents. These disastrous events can reach catastrophic dimensions in terms of human loss. There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster because it depends, to a large extent, on the physical, economic and social environment in which it occurs. What Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 130

Final EIA/EMP Report of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1,20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.-Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal. M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co Pvt Ltd would be considered a major disaster in developing country, equipped to cope with the problems involved, may not mean more than temporary emergency elsewhere. However, all disasters bring in their wake similar consequences that call for immediate action, whether at the local, national or international level, for the rescue and relief of the victims. This includes the search for the dead and injured, medical and social care, removal of the debris, the provision of temporary shelter for the homeless, food, clothing and medical supplies and the rapid re-establishment of essential services. 7.4.2 Objectives of Disaster Management of Plan The Disaster Management Plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage operations in this same order of priorities. Effective implementation of Disaster Management Plan will be ensured by its wide circulation among the staff and workers and training of the personnel through rehearsals. The Disaster Management Plan would reflect the probable consequential severity of undesired event due to deteriorating conditions or through knock on effects. Further the management should be able to demonstrate that their assessment of the consequences uses good supporting evidence and based on currently available and reliable information, incident data from internal and external sources and if necessary the reports of outside agencies. To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the factory or immediate vicinity of the factory, a Plan has to be formulated and this emergency plan is called Disaster Management Plan. The objective of the Industrial Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the combined resources of the Plant and the outside services to achieve the following:  Minimize damage to the property and the environment.  Effect the rescue and medical treatment of victims.  Fulfill the needs of relatives.  Provide authoritative information to news media.  Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected areas.  Safeguard other people.  Initially contain and then ultimately bring the situation under the control.  Preserve subsequent records and equipment for subsequent enquiry of the cause and circumstances leading to emergency. 7.4.3 Emergencies General Emergencies Anticipated The emergencies that could be envisaged in the Plant are as follows:  Contamination of food/water.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 131

 Sabotage / social disorder.  Structural failures.  Slow isolated fires. Specific Emergencies Anticipated During the study of risk assessment, the probabilities of occurrence of hazards are worked out along with the nature of damage. This is the reason why one should study risk assessment in conjunction with DMP Emergency Organization It is recommended to setup an Emergency Organization. A senior executive who has control over the affairs of the Plant would be heading the Emergency Organization. He would be designated as Site Controller. In the case of stores, utilities, open areas which are the not under the control of production heads, executive responsible for maintenance of utilities would be designated as Incident Controller. All the Incident Controllers would be reporting to the Site Controller. Each Incident Controller organizes a team responsible for controlling the incident with the personnel under his control. Shift in-charge would be the Reporting Officer, who would report the incident to the Incident Controller. Emergency Coordinators would be appointed who would undertake the responsibilities like firefighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and support services. For this purposes, Security in-charge, staff of the Personnel Department/Essential services would be engaged. All these personnel would be designated as key personnel. In each shift, electrical supervisor, pump house incharge and other maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event of Power communication system failure, some of staff members in the office/Plant offices would be drafted and their services would be utilised as messengers for quick passing of communications. All these personnel would be declared as essential personnel. Emergency Communication Whosoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire, leakage etc. would inform his immediate superior and Emergency Control Center. The person on duty in the Emergency Control Centre would appraise the site controller. Site controller verifies the situation from the Incident Controller of that area or the shift incharge and takes a decision about implementing on Site Emergency Plan. This would be communicated to all the Incident Controllers and Emergency Coordinators. Simultaneously, the emergency warning system would be activated on the instructions of the Site Controller. Emergency Responsibilities The responsibilities of the key personnel are appended below:- Site Controller

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 132

On receiving information about emergency, he would rush to Emergency Control Centre (ECC) and take the charge of ECC and the situation. He would assess the magnitude of the situation in consultation with the incident controller and decide:  Whether affected area needs to be evacuated.  Whether personnel who are at assembly points need to be evacuated.  Declares Emergency and orders for operation of emergency siren.  Organizes announcement by public address system about location of emergency.  Assesses the areas which are likely to be affected, and need to be evacuated or alerted.  Maintains a continuous review of possible development and assesses the overall situation to decide whether shutting down of any section or whole of the Plant is required.  Directs personnel of rescue, rehabilitation, transport, fire brigade, medical and other designated mutual support systems, locally available, for meeting emergencies.  Controls evacuation of affected areas. If the situation is likely to go out of control or effects are likely to go beyond the premises of the factory, informs to District Emergency Authority, Police, and Hospital and seeks their intervention and help.  Informs Inspector of factories, Deputy Chief Inspector of factories, SPCB and other statutory authorities.  Gives public statement, if necessary.  Keeps record of chronological events and prepares an investigation report and preserves the evidences. After managing the emergent situation and binging the normalcy at the work place, he makes a statement accordingly. Incident Controller  Assembles the incident control team.  Directs operations within the affected areas with the priorities for safety to personnel, minimizes damage to the plant, property and environment and minimizes the loss of materials.  Directs the shutting down and evacuation of Plant and areas likely to be adversely affected by the emergency.  Ensures that all-key personnel help is sought.  Provides advice and information to the Fire and Security officer and the local Fire Services as and when they arrive.  Ensures that all non-essential workers/staff of the effected areas evacuated to the appropriate assembly points and the areas are searched for victims, if any  Understands the need for preservation of evidence so as to facilitate any enquiry into the cause and circumstances, which resulted or escalated the emergency.  Coordinates with emergency services at the site.  Provides tools and safety equipments to the team members.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 133

 Keeps in touch with the team and advise them regarding the method of control to be used.  Keeps the Site Controller informed continuously about the progress being made. Emergency Coordinator - Rescue, Fire Fighting  Rushes to Emergency Control Centre after knowing about the emergency.  Helps the Incident Controller in containment of the emergency.  Ensures fire pumps in operating conditions and instructs pump house operator to be ready for any emergency.  Guides the firefighting crew i.e. Firemen, trained Plant personnel and security staff.  Organizes shifting the firefighting facilities to the emergency site, if required.  Takes guidance of the Incident Controller for firefighting as well as assesses the requirements of outside help.  Arranges the traffic control at the gate and the incident area.  Directs the security staff to the incident site to take part in the emergency operations under his guidance and supervision.  Evacuates the people in the Plant or in the nearby areas as advised by site controller.  Searches for any casualties and arranges proper aid for them.  Assembles search and evacuation team.  Decides paths for the workers evacuating the site  Maintains law and order in the area, and if necessary seeks the help of police and local administration.  Arranges safety tools/equipments for the members of his team. Emergency Coordinator-Medical, Mutual Aid, Rehabilitation, Transport and Communication  The event of failure of electric supply and there by internal telephone, sets up communication point and establishes contact with the Emergency Control Center (ECC) in the event of failure of electric supply and communication network.  Organizes medical treatment to the injured and if necessary, will shift them to nearby hospitals.  Mobilizes extra medical help from outside, if necessary  Keeps a list of qualified first aid providers of the factory and seek their assistance.  Maintains first aid and medical emergency requirements.  Makes sure that all safety equipments are made available to the emergency team.  Assists Site Controller with necessary data and coordinates the emergency activities.  Assists Site Controller in updating emergency plan.  Maintains liaison with Civil Administration.  Ensures availability of canteen facilities and maintenance of rehabilitation centre.  Remains in liaison with Site Controller / Incident Controller.  Ensures availability of necessary cash for rescue / rehabilitation and emergency expenditure. Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 134

 Controls rehabilitation of affected areas at the end of emergency.  Makes available diesel/petrol for transport vehicles engaged in emergency operation. Emergency Coordinator–Essential Services  He would assist Site Controller and Incident Controller  Maintains essential services like Diesel Generator, Water, Fire Water, Compressed Air/Instrument Air, Power Supply for lighting.  Plans alternate facilities in the event of Power failure, to maintain essential services such as lighting, etc.  Organizes separate electrical connections for all utilities and during emergency ensures that the essential services and utilities are not affected.  Gives necessary instructions regarding emergency electrical supply, isolation of certain sections etc to shift in charges and electricians.  Ensures availability of adequate quantities of protective equipments and other emergency materials, spares etc. General Responsibilities of Employees during an Emergency When an emergency warning is raised, the workers, if they are incharge of any process equipment, should adopt safe and emergency shut down and attend any prescribed duty as an essential employee. If no such responsibility has been assigned, he should adopt a safe course to assembly point and await instructions. He should not resort to spread panic. On the other hand, he must assist emergency personnel towards objectives of DMP. 7.4.4 Emergency Facilities Emergency Control Centre  During the emergency, the office block would function as Emergency Control Centre. It would have external Telephone & Fax facility. All the Incident Controllers, Officers, senior personnel would be available there.  The following information and equipments will be provided at the ECC.  Intercom, telephone  Fire suit / gas tight goggles / gloves / helmets  Factory layout, emergency site plan  Emergency lamp / torchlight  Plan indicating locations of hazardous inventories, Plant control room, sources of safety equipment, work road plan, assembly points, rescue locations, vulnerable zones, and escape routes.  Hazard chart  Self-contained breathing apparatus  Hand tools, wind direction, wind velocity indications  Public Address Megaphone, Hand bell, Telephone directories (Internal and P&T).  Address with telephone numbers of key personnel, Emergency coordinator.  Important addresses, telephone numbers of experts from outside, government agencies, neighboring industries etc. Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 135

 Emergency shut down procedures.  Nominal roll of employees. Emergency Power Supply Plant facilities would be connected to Diesel Generator and would be placed in auto mode. Fire Fighting Facilities First Aid and Fire Fighting equipment suitable for emergency should be maintained as per statutory requirements/ TAC Regulations. Fire hydrant line covering major areas would be laid. It would be maintained at 6 kg / sq.cm. pressure. Location Of Wind Sock On the top of production block and on the top of administrative block wind socks would be installed to indicate direction of wind during emergency period. Emergency Medical Facilities Gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical burns, fire burns etc. would be maintained in the medical centre as well as in the emergency control room. Private medical practitioners help would be sought. Government hospital would be approached for emergency help. Apart from Plant first aid facilities, external facilities would be augmented. Names of Medical Personnel, Medical facilities in Raniganj would be prepared and updated. Necessary specific medicines for emergency treatment of burnt patients and for those affected by toxicity would be maintained. Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would be provided and maintained. The help of nearby industrial managements in this regard would also be taken on mutual support basis. 7.4.5 Emergency Actions Emergency Warning Communication of emergency would be made familiar to the personnel inside the plant and people outside. An emergency warning system would be established. Emergency Shutdown There are number of facilities which can be provided to help in dealing with hazardous conditions. The suggested arrangements are  Stop feed  Deluge contents  Remove heat  Transfer contents Methods of removing additional heat include removal by the normal cooling arrangements or by the use of an emergency cooling system. Cooling facilities which vaporizes liquid may

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 136

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 137

 Safety goggles  Welders equipment for eye and face protection  Ear plugs  Canister gas masks  Welding face shield  Welding hand sleeve  Self contained breathing apparatus  Leather apron  Safety belt / line man's safety belt  Leather hand gloves  Asbestos hand gloves  Industrial safety shoes with steel toe  Electrical safety shoes without steel toe and gum boots  Protective clothing etc. Plan of pre-placement and periodical health status of workers Pre-employment check up is mandatory and following tests are being conducted and will be continued:  Chest x rays  Audiometry  Spirometry  Vision testing (Far & Near vision, color vision and any other ocular defect)  ECG  Haemogram (examination of the blood)  Urine (Routine and Microscopic)  Complete physical examination  Musculo-skeletal disorders (MSD)  Backache  Joint Pain  Fatigue,. Medical records of each employee will be maintained separately and updated. Age, sex wise, department wise data on the above parameters will be maintained. Annual health report will be published. List of equipment for Occupational Health Monitoring  ECG  Analytical Pan Balance  Dust Sampling devices  Heat stress monitoring device (Personal)  Thermometer  Noise Monitoring device  Spiro meter  Audiometric device

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 138

 Vision screener Occupational health check-up will be outsourced by third party. However, ambulance facility will be provided within the plant. 7.6 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT S.N Impact Predicted Impacts o. Parameter Positive Negative 1 Human  No displacement of people or Nil Settlement habitations would occur, as the proposed expansion will be carried out partly in the existing plant premises and partly in the additional land adjoining the existing plant.  Additional land does not contain any habitation and part of Industrial area. 2 Livelihoods  No loss of existing livelihoods. Direct or A moderate influx of indirect is expected to occur. people in project  Additional non-agricultural livelihood construction and opportunities are expected both operation phases. directly and as spinoffs.  Most of the worker are employed from local areas only. 3 Employmen  No loss of existing employment due Nil t to the proposed expansion project is Generation expected.  Total employees in the existing plant 130 nos., all are from local area.  Now as a part of expansion, additional employment of about 170 nos. comprising of skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled workers, during operation of expansion project.  Indirect employment to about 100 nos. during construction as a sequeltoincome multiple effect and induced growth during construction & operation phases of the project.  Majority of them will be local women and youth. 4 Incomes  Improvement of money incomes of Nil and locals engaged in tertiary businesses by Revenue an average 10 % through induced spending. 5 Demograph  The population levels of the Nil ics neighboring villages are not likely to change in any significant manner.  The lifestyles of people are expected to improve in tune with the rise in Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 139

incomes and improvement in infrastructure facilities.  The skill sets of the local residents are expected to improve in keeping with the emerging employment opportunities 6 Community  Health of people residing in all the three If Emission Control Health impact zones is not likely to be Systems are not impacted adversely considering the operated & proper nature of emissions and the state-of- dust suppression the-art Emission control systems systems not adopted planned. for control of Particulate emissions from Stack & Fugitive emissions from Raw material handling areas, it may raise community health issues. 7 Physical  Road and power network in the area is If massive Increase in Infrastructu expected to be strengthened as a sequel vehicular traffic may re to industrial development around. lead to higher incidence of road accidents. If influx of workers from outside areas then there will be an increased pressure on water supply and sanitation in the neighborhood during construction phase. 8 Social  Improvement in housing stock and If influx of workers Infrastructu educational facilities could be expected from outside areas re in the long run as industrialization in then there will be an the area gains acceleration. increased pressure on residential accommodation the neighbourhood during construction phase

The project activity will create positive impact on the quality of life of the people living around the plant due to market multipler effect.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 140

7.7 RESETTLEMENT AND REHABILITATION M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co Pvt Ltd., has acquired 2.46 Ha. Of land in Mangalpur Industrial Area, Raniganj, which was developed by WB. So, there is no involvement of rehabilitation and resettlement in the proposed project.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 141

CHAPTER-8 : PROJECT BENEFIT

8.1 DIRECT EMPLOYMENT About 100 people on daily wages basis will get employment during the construction stage. There are 130 persons employed in the existing unit for the various job categories. In the proposed expansion project, about 170 persons will be employed during operational phase, in the skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled category. The preference will be given to local population for employment in the semi-skilled and unskilled category. 8.2 INDIRECT EMPLOYMENT Due to the proposed project, indirect employments will be generated to meet the Grocery Shops, Residential Requirements, Garments Requirements, Transportation Facilities, Health Care Facilities, etc. These kinds of requirements will increase the prevailing scenario, which will generate the indirect employment. 8.3 DIRECT REVENUE EARNING TO THE NATIONAL AND STATE EXCHEQUER The proposed project will contribute towards revenue to the Central & State exchequer in the form of income tax, GST etc. Indirect contribution to the Central & State exchequer will be there due to Income by way of registration of trucks, payment of road tax, income tax from individual as well as taxes from associated units. Thus, the proposed project will help the Government by paying different taxes from time to time, which is a part of revenue and thus, will help in developing the area. Demand of the products in foreign market is also significant, which will boost the export potential of the company as well as country. Export oriented units play vital role in development of economy as well as local physical infrastructure for further boosting of industrial development with sustainable approach as the industries need to maintain good environment & safety condition to get better foreign mark 8.4 SUMMARY The management will recruit the semi-skilled and unskilled workers from the nearby villages. The project activity and the management will definitely support the local Panchayat and provide other form of assistance for the development of public amenities in this region. The company management will contribute to the local schools, dispensaries for the welfare of the villagers. A suitable combination of trees that can grow fast with good leaf cover will be adopted to develop the greenbelt.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 142

CHAPTER-9 : ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

9.1 APPLICABILITY OF CBA AND SUMMARY During the scoping/ToR stage, no recommendation of environmental cost benefit analysis was suggested by the appraisal committee. ToR granted vide File No:-No.J-11011/253/2020-IA.II (I), dated-26.10.2020 by MoEFCC, New Delhi Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis study is not required for the proposed project.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 143

CHAPTER-10 : ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

10.0 INTRODUCTION Any industrial development is associated with certain positive impacts as well as some negative impacts on the environment. The negative or adverse impacts cannot possibly rule out of scientific development. The environment management plan is prepared with a view to facilitate effective environmental management of the project, in general and implementation of the mitigation measures in particular. This plan helps in formulation, implementation and monitoring of the environmental parameters during and after commissioning of the project. 10.1 ENVIRONMENT POLICY The Company has a well-defined policy to keep the Environment clean and green. The company has decided that all effective steps shall be taken to ensure that flow of information from working level to top level should flow in a smooth and coordinated manner, so that in case any deficiency is noted, it is brought to the notice of top management and preventive and corrective action is initiated in a systematic manner. M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt Ltd., is committed to:-  Follow the National laws and regulations related to Environment Protection and Prevention & Control of Pollution.  Design, construct and operate the plant by adopting technology and process that are sustainable and environmentally acceptable in the country.  Adoption of State of the Art technology for prevention and control of impacts.  Take steps to prevent, minimize and control releases to air, water and land of substances which could adversely affect human health and the environment.  Operate facilities and conduct activities taking into consideration the efficient use of natural resources.  Provide and maintain healthy and safe working condition for all employees.  Ensure the protection of the health and safety of workers.  Adopt measures to ensure that all its contractors and business associates also comply with National laws and regulations related to Environment & Control of Pollution.  Focus on continual improvement of environmental performance and ensure involvement of employees at all levels by providing training & awareness. For effective and efficient implementation of Environment Policy, Company shall:-  Ensure the allocation of sufficient financial, human and technological resources along with organizational infrastructure for its implementation.  Prepare and maintain site specific, list of all the applicable regulations legal records, compliance requirements and compliance status.  Develop and implement innovative processes focused on reducing consumption of energy and water and minimizing quantity of waste dispose.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 144

 Review facilities and programs on a regular basis and establish monitorable targets, quantified as appropriate for continual improvement of our environmental performance.  As far as practicable, purchase products and services that will have minimum impact on the environment.  Communicate the environmental commitment and performance of the organization to the stakeholders.  Establish an organizational structure to oversee the effective implementation of corporate environment policy. Define key responsibilities with the various levels of organization for policy implementation. 10.2 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT CELL Company is responsible for implementation of all the mitigation and management measures suggested in Environmental Monitoring Program. A separate department "Environmental Management Cell" (EMC) shall be established to look after all environmental related matters of the plant. The EMC will supervise the reported activity from time to time for smooth implementation of Environmental Mitigation and Management measures and will take necessary actions if required. The cell will act to ensure the suitability, adequacy and effectiveness of the Environment Management Program. It will also ensure to meet all the Statutory Requirements. EMC structure is given below:-

Figure 10.1 Organization Chart of Environmental Monitoring Cell 10.2.1 Interaction with the State Pollution Control Board EMC shall be in regular touch with WBPCB and shall send them environmental monitoring reports regularly in the prescribed format, as per the prevailing practice. Any new regulations considered by State/Central Pollution Control Board for the Industry shall be taken care of by EMC 10.2.2 Provide Training EMC would be responsible for the implementation of the EMP, needs to be trained on the effective implementation of the environmental issues. To ensure the success of the

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 145

Final EIA/EMP Report of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1,20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.-Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co Pvt Ltd implementation set up proposed, there is a high requirement of training and skill up-gradation. For the proposed project, additional training facilities will be developed for environmental control. For proper implementation of the EMP, the officials responsible for EMP implementation will be trained accordingly. To achieve the overall objective of pollution control it is essential not only to provide latest pollution control and monitoring systems but also to provide trained manpower resources to operate and maintain the same. Therefore, apart from the EMC, specific training will be provided to personnel handling the operation and maintenance of different pollution control equipment. In-plant training facilities will be developed for environmental control. The training will be given to employees to cover the following fields:  Awareness of pollution control and environmental protection to all.  Operation and maintenance of specialized pollution control equipment.  Organize field monitoring, maintenance and calibration of pollution monitoring instruments.  Laboratory testing of pollutants.  Repair of pollution monitoring instruments.  Occupational health/safety.  Disaster management.  Environmental management.  Afforestation / plantation and post care of plants.  Knowledge of norms, regulations and procedures.  Risk assessment and Disaster Management. 10.2.3 Other Responsibilities of the Cell Will Include MOEFCC approved lab will be retained to generate the environment quality data in respect of air, water, noise, soil and meteorology and prepare the Environmental Report.  Timely renewal of Consents & Authorization will be taken care of.  Submitting environmental monitoring report to WBPCB. The cell will also take mitigative or corrective measures as required or suggested by the Board.  Conduct and submit annual Environmental Statement to WBPCB.  Prepare and submit six monthly report on the compliance with the conditions of the environmental clearance  Keeping the management updated on regular basis about the findings / results of monitoring activities and proposes measures to improve environmental performance.  Conducting regular safety drills and training programs to educate employees on safety practices. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be responsible for the issues related to occupational safety and health.  Conducting safety and health audits to ensure that recommended safety and health measures are followed.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 146

10.2.4 SOP for Flow of Information The Environmental Management Group would consist of executives and supporting staff headed by senior official reporting to CEO. During the construction of the project, Project Review Team (PRT) meetings will be held every month wherein officials from the project and corporate centre will participate and discuss the progress and problems related to implementation of schedules of activities for construction, completion and commissioning. It will be ensured that all pollution control measures identified are implemented in a coordinated manner, linking the overall project implementation plans. Monthly Operation Review Team (ORT) meetings for the project will be held during project operation. In these meetings in addition to routine Operation and Maintenance (O&M) problems issues related to environment will also be discussed. Dedicated groups for operation & maintenance of major systems like Bag Filters, Waste Treatment Plant, Solid Waste Utilization, etc. shall be formed. The issues related to the compliance of environmental norms including problems associated with the mitigation measures identified will be included in the agenda for quarterly review meetings, wherein action plan for remedial measures will be drawn and monitored. Company has developed Environment Policy and well laid Standard Operating Procedures to bring in any deviation / violation of the environment norms as prescribed by regulatory authorities. The Head-Environment will brief the ORT about the environmental performance of the plant and all compliances/non-compliances are brought to the notice of MD. Action plan is drawn for rectifying the NC, budget is sanctioned (CAPEX & OPEX) and approval is obtained in the meeting itself. Minutes of the Meeting are prepared. In the next weekly review meeting, the action plan is discussed and the NC is closed. The MD includes Environmental Performance as an Agenda in the monthly Board Meetings and circulates the MOMs. In this manner the Board of Directors are appraised of the Non- Compliances and CAPA taken to address the NC’s. System Of Reporting Environmental Non-Compliances / Violations To The Board Of Directors are shown below:-

Chairman/Board of Director

Managing Director

Environmental Officer Head (EHS)

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 147

10.3 EMP DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE 10.3.1 Land Environment The site for expansion project is flat and already levelled, hence no levelling is required. Earth excavated during civil foundations will be reused for raising the plinth and backfilling the columns. Dust generated due to earthwork including excavation and transportation activities, especially during dry weather conditions, will be controlled by water sprinkling. 10.3.2 Air Environment Dust will be generated at work site during the construction activity like excavation and vehicular movement. Providing suitable surface treatment to ease the traffic flow and regular sprinkling of water will reduce the dust generation. All internal roads will be asphalted and cleaned daily, so there will be less generation of re-suspended road dust. 10.3.3 Water Environment Temporary drainage work will be maintained, removed and reinstated as required, and all other precautions will be taken for avoidance of damage by flooding and silt. Sedimentation pit of sufficient capacity will be constructed to trap silt-laden water during monsoon. The wastewater will be reused for dust suppression. 10.3.4 Noise Environment The noise generated during the constructed phase will be due to the movement of vehicles and construction equipment. Construction equipment and transport vehicles will be properly maintained so that noise generation is minimized. Regular maintenance schedule will be adopted for all construction equipment and vehicles 10.3.5 Solid Waste Management Careful design, planning and good site management would minimize waste of materials such as concrete, mortars and cement grouts. Construction waste will be segregated as much as possible at site itself to increase the feasibility of recycling concrete and masonry as filling material and steel pieces as saleable scrap. Muck shall be generated from drains and sedimentation pits. The muck shall be collected daily and stored at earmarked place. It shall be finally disposed within the plant premises for plinth raising purpose. Litter disposal and collection points shall be established around the all construction work sites. Construction waste shall be segregated as much as possible at site itself to increase the feasibility of recycling concrete and masonry as filling material and steel pieces as saleable scrap. 10.3.6 Sanitation & Safety Measures of Construction Workers Construction workers will be taken from surrounding villages. They will be made aware of possible hazards and safety measures that need to be taken during construction activities through organized training. Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs) such as dust masks, goggles, earplugs/ earmuffs, safety gloves, safety belts, safety shoe with toe protection, gumboots will be made available at construction site. Construction workers and vehicle

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 148

10.4.2 Action Plan for Control and Monitoring Of Fugitive Emissions The fugitive dust (PM) emissions occur from road, raw material unloading and loading, vehicle movement leading the resuspension of settled dust, etc. Following mitigation measures are recommended for its control:

i. Apply water to suppress dust generation namely use of Anti-smog guns, Water canons, Water sprinklers and Hydrant and hoses connected to water reservoir/tank

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 149

ii. Use of dust suppressants namely liquid polymer emulsion, agglomeration chemicals (lignosulphonates, polyacrylamides), cementitious products like lime and calcium sulphate, Petroleum based emulsions, Chloride salts (Mg and Ca) iii. Use of scaffolding sheets /nets, wind fencing for dust control iv. Stabilised concreted earthworks with stone, soil, geotextiles, vegetation, compacting. v. Use enclosures – covering for stockpiles – tarpaulin, plastic, fences, screens vi. Keep proper shape of stockpiles (avoid steep slopes and faces) vii. Remove muck from truck tyres an under bodies prior to leaving the plant premises viii. Minimize the drop height of raw materials ix. All road surfaces for permanent movement of trucks shall be paved (Concreted) x. Apply water spray in conjunction with cutting, grinding, drilling xi. Provide enclosure around mixing process xii. Use mechanical road sweeping machine for regular cleaning of roads xiii. Use industrial vacuum cleaner for cleaning all shop floors and roofs. xiv. Monitoring of fugitive dust emissions (at 20 upwind and downwind direction using HVS) 10.4.3 Noise Pollution Management Plan During proposed project, the major noise-generating source will be machinery and equipment. The proposed equipment of the proposed plant would be designed for noise levels not exceeding 75 dB (A) at plant boundary. In general the following methods will be adopted to control the noise pollution.  The use of barricades  Sized ore / materials will be purchased so that crushing is eliminated.  The use of vibration insulation techniques at foundation of fans and other moving machinery.  The use of mufflers, and acoustic louvers in DG sets.  Proper plantation of trees.  Providing earmuffs and earplugs to the plant personnel. 10.4.4 Water Pollution Management Plan The entire wastewater from the plant will be reused and there will be no discharge of wastewater outside the plant premises under normal circumstances. During any emergency /breakdown/abnormal operating conditions the treated wastewater conforming to minimum discharge standards will be disposed into municipal drain.  Water will be sourced from ADDA.  DRI Plant, SMS and Rolling Mill do not require any water for the manufacturing process. Water is required only for cooling purpose.  There is no wastewater discharge from the DRI Plant, as closed circuit cooling system will be followed.  There is no wastewater discharge from the Induction Furnace, as closed circuit cooling system will be followed.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 150

Table 10:1 Inlet and Outlet Characteristics of Treated Process Effluent Parameters Inlet characteristics Outlet characteristics pH 6.5 - 8.5 6.5 - 8.5 TSS 50 - 200mg/l < 100 mg/l Oil & Grease 10 - 35mg/l < 10 mg/l BOD 10-125 < 30 COD 20-250 <250 Iron 1.0 - 6mg/l < 1.0 mg/l Chromium 0.2 – 0.5 mg/l < 0.2 mg/l Phosphates 5.0 – 15 mg/l < 5.0 mg/l

10.5 SOLID WASTE GENERATION & DISPOSAL The following will be the solid waste generation from the existing plant, proposed expansion project and method of disposal. Table 10:2 Industrial Waste Management S.No Name Quantity, Utilization 1 DRI Char 36,000 100% In power generation Ash/Dust from In civil construction purpose and Will be given 2 15,000 DRI to Brick manufacturers. Kiln Accretion 3 600 Will be utilized in road construction Slag Slag from SMS will be crushed and iron will be recovered & remaining non-magnetic material will be inert nature and will be used as sub 4 SMS slag 24,000 base material in road construction/ used for brick manufacturing/ civil construction works like PCC and wall construction. Mill scales Will be given to Ferro alloy 5 15,00 from Rolling Mill manufacturing units and used in IF. 6 End Cutting 3,420 Will be recycled to SMS unit

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 151

Will be given to cement plants/Brick 7 Ash from CPP 22,600 manufacturers. MOU has been executed. Note: Solid wastes such as dolochar, accretion slag will be stored in designated storage yard. All stock piles will be made on top of a stable liner to avoid leaching of materials to ground water. Ash generated will be stored at designated area only. There will not be any open storage of fly ash. Hazardous waste generation, storage & disposal Waste oil: 1.0 KL / Annum This will be stored in covered HDPE drums in a designated area and will be given to WBPCB approved vendors. Table 10:3 Municipal Solid Waste Generation & Its Disposal Type of Municipal Solid Waste Proposed Method of Disposal Construction debris (generated : Used for landfill within the plant site to the during construction phase) extent possible and recyclables will be given to authorized recyclers. Canteen waste (90 Kg/day) :  Used in composting/Vermiculture.  Used as manure for greenbelt development within the premises. Recyclable materials : Given to SPCB authorized dealers.

 The lead acid battery or dry battery will be given to authorized recycler having authorization from competent authority;  E-waste generated from the plant will be given to authorized recycler having authorization from competent authority; Table 10:4 Typical Composition Of Solid Waste S.No DESCRIPTION CHEMICAL COMPOSITION 1. Dolo Char (% by weight) Carbon : 25.0 % Hydrogen : 0.75 % Nitrogen : 0.74 % Sulpher : 0.30 % Moisture : 9.50 % Ash : 60.0 % GCV : 2,200 Kcals/Kg 2. Dust from Bag filters Fe + Fe2 O3 : 20 to 25 % Fixed Carbon + Coal Char : 20 to 40 % CaO + SiO2 : 35 to 50 %

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 152

3. Ash Silica - 60.08% Alumina - 29.50% Iron oxide - 4.82% Titania - 1.70% Phospheric Anhydride - 0.53% Lime - 1.70% Magnesia - 0.75% Sulphuric Anhydride - 0.27% K2O(By difference) & Na2O(By difference)- 0.65 % 4. Kiln Accretion Slag (% by weight) Feo – 11.78 % SiO2 – 31.0 % Al2O3 – 24.45 % CaO – 4.5 % MgO – 0.16 % 5. SMS Slag Trace Element Analysis (mg/kg) Al : 1.6 Cr(III) : 760 Mo : 26 Pb : 24 10.6 MEASURES FOR IMPROVEMENT OF ECOLOGY There is no ecologically sensitive area within 10 km radius of the proposed plant. No wildlife exists in the vicinity of the project. Plantation programme will be undertaken at several areas. 10.6.1 Greenbelt Development A greenbelt of 2.74 Ha (33.01 %) will be developed in the plant premises. 10 m – 20 m wide greenbelt will be developed around the plant premises. Site Preparation: The location earmarked for greenbelt shall be fenced. The soil quality of the plant area is fit for plantation. Plant propagation: Nursery raised saplings of 2 – 3 feet height of trees and shrubs will be purchased from local nursery and Forest Dept. Plantation: This will include digging pits with proper spacing, filling pits with prepared soil, plantation of seedlings and watering. The size of the pit will be 1m x 1m x 1 m for trees and 0.5 m x 0.5 m x 0.5 m for shrubs. The pits will be filled with soil mixture. The soil will be irrigated soaking wet prior to placing of seedling. The water required for greenbelt development will be met from the treated effluents generated during plant operation. During construction period water supply will be met from available sources. Plantation will start from the beginning of construction activity (after the site is made clear and demarcating the green portion). Soil proposed to be filled in the pit after plantation will be mixed with compost (1:1). Plantation will be done after first rainfall. Adequate protection

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 153

Final EIA/EMP Report of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1,20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.-Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co Pvt Ltd will be ensured for achieving high survival rate of the planted saplings. Water and nutrients / manure will be given at appropriate intervals. Total Trees required as per CPCB/MoEF&CC Norms@2,500/Ha = 2.74 x 2,500 = 6,850 No’s Already Planted trees are 1,500 No’s Total no of trees to be planted during expansion = 5,350 No’s Table 10:5: Proposed Plant Species with Local Names for Expansion Project S.No. Common Name Scientific Name Family No of Trees 01. Arjun Terminalia arjuna Combretaceae 500 02. Ashwatha Ficus religiosa Moraceae 250 03. Akashmoni Acacia moniliformis Mimosaceae 250 04. Aam Mangiferaindica Anacardiaceae 500 05. Pipal Ficus benghalensis Moraceae 300 06. Chatim Alstonia scholaris Apocynaceae 250 07. Debdaru Polyalthia longifolia anonaceae 250 08. Ghora neem Meliaazedarch Meliaceae 250 09. Ashok - - 250 10. Jarul Lagerstroemia speciosa Lythraceae 250 11. Karanj Derris indica Fabaceae 250 12. Krishnachura Delonix regia Caesalpinaceae 250 13. Neem Azadirachta indica Meliaceae 250 14. Pakur Ficus infectoria Moraceae 250 15. Radhachura Amaltas Caesalpinaceae 450 16. Tentul Tamarindus indica Caesalpinaceae 400 17. Sisso Dalbergia sissoo Papilionaceae 450 Species has been selected on following basis:-  Fast growth;  Capacity to endure water stress and climate extremes after initial establishment;  Tolerance to specific conditions or alternatively wide adaptability to eco physiological conditions;  Differences in height and growth habits;  Pleasing appearances;  Providing shade; and Trees should be tall in peripheral curtain plantation, with large, spreading canopy in the primary and secondary attenuation zones 10.7 RAIN WATER HARVESTING PLAN Rain Water can be harvested either storing in tanks for ready use or charged into soil for withdrawal later i.e. ground water recharging. Satyam Group has decided to installed Rain Water Harvesting system to prevent runoff and to help reduce fresh water consumption. Storm water network will be designed throughout the site for collection of roof top as well as internal runoff during the monsoon season. Pipeline and storm water drainage will be connected/diverted to water harvesting tank without any contamination or after removing

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 154

Final EIA/EMP Report of Expansion of Sponge Iron Production (1,20,000 TPA), MS Billets (1,35,000 TPA), Captive Power Plant (15 MW) and Re-Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA), At Plot No G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, PO & PS – Raniganj, Distt.-Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co Pvt Ltd impurities i.e. leaves, floating materials, birds drop out etc. During rainy season, the rain water will be collected from roofs and open area in collection tank having 25000 KL capacity and the collected water will be used for industrial activities. Average 120 rainy days, average rainfall 1,474 mm and following basic details have been worked for designing the Rain Water Harvesting System: Roof top area available for rain water harvesting: 150 m2 Run of Calculation= 150 x 1.47 x 0.9 = 198.45 m3/hr Total Green Area = 24437.68 m2 Run of Calculation = 24437.68 x 1.47 x 0.2 = 7,184.67 m3/hr Total Paved Area = 75,775.88 m2 Run of Calculation = 75,775.88 x 1.47 x 0.7 = 77,973.38 m3/hr Total Rain Water can be harvested in Monsoon season = 198.45 + 7184.67 + 77973.38 = 85,356.5 m3 Total Rain Water/Days = 85,356.5/120 = 711.91 m3 Three day Retention Period = 711.3 x 3 = 2,133.91 m3 01 of Rain water Harvesting Tank will be constructed in south block of the plot having capacity of 25,000 KL. The water harvested in the tank will be used for dust suppression and green belt. Internal storm water drain with natural slope around the plot will be provided. The effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of drainage pipes/channels etc. Regular checking before and during the monsoon will be done to see that none of the drains/drainage facilities are clogged and are efficient to collect the rainwater under rain water harvesting program. The clogged drains will be cleaned up immediately on report of any clogging or blockage. Internal Storm water drain with adequate slope around the plot is been provided. We will construct the garland drains along the plant boundary for run off material. 10.8 ENERGY & NATURAL RESOURCE CONSERVATION MEASURES  In the proposed expansion project, flue gases generated from DRI kilns will be taken to WHRB and after heat recovery it will be used for Power Generation. A total of 8 MW will be generated through flue gases from the proposed DRI units.  Unburnt Coal (Dolochar) generated from the DRI Plant will be used as fuel in the AFBC Boiler.  Rooftop Solar Panel, Solar Powered Street Lights etc. will be installed wherever possible.  In the proposed project regenerative type burners will be installed in reheating furnaces.  It is proposed to provide LED lights in the offices and common areas.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 155

 It is proposed to provide Energy Efficient Motors as per NEMA Premium® Efficiency Electric Motor specification or equivalent classifications and will use Variable Frequency Drives VFD for control of electric motors. 10.9 BUDGET FOR EMP The capital cost for environmental management of the proposed project is estimated to be Rs.794.5 lakhs. Rs.177.5 lakhs per year will be required as annual recurring expenses to meet the recurring expenditure for implementing the measures. The break-up of the investment is shown in Table 10.6. Table 10:6 Investment on Environmental Protection Measures (Rs. in Lakhs) S. No Activity Capital Recurring expenses Cost proposed/ annum (Lakh) (Lakh ) 1 Pollution control during construction 10 -- phase Air Emission Management (ESPs, Fume/Dust extraction systems with Bag 2 450 50 filters, Chimneys, and Industrial Vacuum cleaner) 3 Green Belt development 7.50 7.50 Water Pollution Control Measures (STP, ETP, Garland Drains around stock pile 4 with runoff treatment system,, separate 65 10 storm water drains along plant boundary with sedimentation tanks, etc) Occupational Health (OHC with doctor and 5 paramedical staff, medicines, first aid, 24 15 ambulance with basic equipment,) Post Project Environmental Monitoring (CEMS (2 stacks), CAAQMS (1 inside 6 plant), Manual Monitoring stations (3 40 16 outside plant), water and wastewater, Noise Meter Raw materials storage yard (scientific 7 make), Solid wastes storage facilities, 8 4 utilization and disposal 8 Noise Mitigation measures. 5 1 9 Plant Safety and Risk mitigation measures 40 8 10 Rainwater Harvesting structures 15 4 Energy conservation Measures (Solar 11 lights, water heating systems, LED lights, 10 2 etc) Development of EMD and Laboratory for 12 120 60 routine environmental monitoring Total 794.5 177.5

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 156

As per MoEF&CC Office Memorandum vide F.No.22-65/2017-IA.III dated. 30th September 2020, following is budgetary allocation (Rs.53.5 Lakhs) for commitment made by Project Proponent to address the concern raised during public hearing S.No Concerns Physical activity & Budget Target for implementation \ raised during action plan INR of action plan public hearing (Lakh) 1st year 2nd year 1 Improve Health Provide the Medical 15.5 Lakhs 10 Lakhs 5.5 Lakhs Infrastructure equipment to 20 Bed - 4 Lakhs In In Raniganj in Area Government Hospital Ballabhpur Health Centre / Health Centre at 20 O2 Cylinder – & 3 Lakh Raniganj, Ballavpur Baktarnag

and Baktarnagar 10 - Oxygen ar (Beds, Oxygen Concentrator – 5 Health Cylinder, Oxygen Lakh Centre Concentrator, AC, Air Purifer) 8 Air Purifier – 2 Lakh

Sanitizer and Mask – 1.5 lakh 2 Repair of roads 2000 m road will be 10 lakh The work in Baktar nagar strengthened. This will be and Chak will be done in completed Brindabanpur consultation with the in first village panchayat year 3 Providing Willing and 10.5 Lakhs Training of Training of 13 employment to employable youths 12 persons persons will be local people will be identified in Stipend – 3.0 will be completed in Lakh completed consultation with 2nd year (1000/- stipend in 1st year gram panchayat of to 25 persons for village Mangalpur 1 year) (25 Nos). They will be trained in ITI Fee – 7.5 Raniganj ITI for Lakhs trades namely (30000/- yearly fee for 25 electrician, fitters, persons) welders, painters, and civil construction work, etc. Fees will be paid by PP. After successful completion of training, the youths will be offered employment in company

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 157

4 Infrastructure PP will make pucca 10 Lakhs PP will PP will development of kitchen with fume 3 Kitchen – 2.5 complete complete work local Primary exhaust in 3 local Lakhs work in in Baktar Nagar 400 Tables & Schools schools providing Mangalpur school in 2nd Chairs – 4.0 L mid-day meals to 12 Computer – and Chak year students, provide 3.0 Lakhs Brindaban furniture, computers 3 Colour printer pur and colour printers – 1.5 Lakhs schools to the 3 schools Mangalpur village Baktar nagar village Chak Brindabanpur village

5 Development Make recharge shaft Rs. 7.5 Lakhs PP will PP will of rain water type RWH structures complete complete the harvesting in 3 villages the work work in Baktar structures Mangalpur village in 2 nagar in 2nd Baktar nagar village villages in year Chak Brindabanpur first year village

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 158

CHAPTER-11 : SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

11.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt Ltd. is operating a 100 TPD sponge iron plant in Mangalpur Industrial area, Raniganj, West Bengal, since 2002. CTE and CTO was issued to the existing plant by WBPCB. The company wants to expand the plant and make additional sponge iron, billets, TMT bars and generate power using WHRB and AFBC. The registered office of this company is situated at 20B, Abdul Hamid Street, East India House, Block No-7A, 7th Floor, Kolkata-700069, West Bengal. Table 11:1 Project Capacity Sponge Iron Production Existing Expansion Total Capacity No of Rotary Kiln 02 No’s 01 No’s Capacity of Rotary Kiln 100 TPD 200 TPD Production capacity per day 200 Ton 200 Ton 1,20,000 TPA No. of days operation per day 300 300 Installed Capacity Per Annum 60,000 TPA 60,000 TPA Billets Production No of Induction Furnace 3 No. Melting Capacity of Induction Furnace 15 Ton Each

No of Heat per Day 10 Nil 1,35,000 TPA Production capacity per day 450 Ton

No. of days operation per day 300 Installed Capacity Per Annum 1,35,000 TPA Rolling Mill No of Re-heating Furnace 01 No Melting Capacity of Furnace 10 Ton Each Production capacity per day Nil 200 Ton 60,000 TPA No. of days operation per day 300 Days Installed Capacity Per Annum 60,000 TPA Captive Power Plant Power Plant

 WHRB Boiler (03 No’s) 2 x 10 TPH-4MW Nil 1 x 22 TPH-4MW 15 MW

 AFBC Boiler (01 No’s) 1 x 30 TPH-7MW “The project falls under Category ‘A’ of Schedule 3 (a), as per the EIA Notification, 2006 & its amendment till date and will be appraised by EAC (Industry-1), MoEF&CC, New Delhi” MoEFCC issued Standard Terms of References (TOR) for conducting the EIA studies Vide F. No:-J-11011/253/2020-IA.II (I) submitting the same to WBPCB for conducting public hearing. Public hearing was conducted on 5-1-2021.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 159

Final EIA report has been prepared after incorporating the comments and suggestions obtained during public hearing and submitted to MOEF&CC. The Final EIA will be appraised by the Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry-1) at MOEF&CC, New Delhi for grant of EC. Project Promoters: M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt. Ltd.is promoted by following directors:- SL. No Name of the Directors Work Experience

Location of Project The project site is at G-7, B-7/11 & G-7/A, Mangalpur Industrial Estate, Raniganj, Distt- Paschim Bardhaman, West Bengal, NH-2 is at distance of about 0.30 km from Project Site towards ENE direction. The nearest Railway Station is Raniganj Railway Station, which is located about 3.0 km distance from the project site towards West direction. Raniganj city is located at about 1.0 km distance from the Project site towards WNW direction. The distance of NH-60 is about 3.0 km from the Project site towards West direction. The nearest important Airport is Netaji Subhas Chandra Bose International (NSCBI) Airport, Kolkata, which is situated at about 170 km distance in South-East direction from the project site. Moreover, the unit is also enjoying the facility of Kazi Nazrul Islam Airport, Durgapur which is almost 10.5 km away from the site towards East. The project site has good connectivity with sea port of Kolkata, Haldia, Paradip and Vishakhapatnam. River Damodar is flowing at a distance of 4.0 km from the Project site towards SW direction. There is no River/ Canal/Port in the existing plant area. There is no village or human settlement in the plant area. The climate in the area is dry with extreme temperature variation. No National Park/sanctuary falls within 5 km of the plant area. The location is in Seismic Zone-III. The Co-ordinates of the project site are given below :- Table 11:2 Pillar Co-ordinates S. No Latitude Longitude 1 23°36'42.43"N 87° 8'35.34"E 2 23°36'40.58"N 87° 8'37.48"E 3 23°36'44.77"N 87° 8'41.56"E 4 23°36'38.75"N 87° 8'47.52"E 5 23°36'34.79"N 87° 8'43.19"E 6 23°36'37.21"N 87° 8'39.71"E 7 23°36'35.92"N 87° 8'36.57"E 8 23°36'30.60"N 87° 8'36.54"E 9 23°36'30.97"N 87° 8'42.37"E 10 23°36'29.42"N 87° 8'41.69"E

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 160

11 23°36'29.12"N 87° 8'37.96"E 12 23°36'28.33"N 87° 8'37.45"E 13 23°36'28.92"N 87° 8'35.57"E The following is the environmental setting within the 10 Km. radius of the plant site: Table 11:3 Environmental features within 10 Km. radius of the plant site SL.No Salient Features / Environmental Distance W.R.T. Site / Remarks Features 1 Type of Land Industrial Land 2 Type of land ( Study area) As per LULC the land use within 10 Km. is as follows: Settlement-28.25%, Sand-2.58%, Water Bodies-2.04%, Forest-0.98%, Industrial- 6.91%, Mining-2.53%, Open Scrub- 45.01% and Agriculture Land-12.68% 3 National Park/ Wild life Not Present Within Study Area sanctuary/Biosphere reserve/ Tiger Reserve/migratory routes for Birds/Corridor 4 Historical places/Places of Tourist Not Present Within Study Area importance/Archeological sites 5 Industrial areas/cluster/Critically Not Present Within Study Area polluted area as per MoEF&CC Office Memorandum dated 13th January 2010. 6 Defense Installations Not Present Within Study Area 7 Nearest village Mangalpur – 0.70 km (South) 8 No. of villages in the study area 36 9 Forests Gangajalghati PF – 5.5 km –SSW 10 Water body Damodar River – 4.0 km – SW Mejia Lake – 6.0 km – SW 11 Highway NH-2 = 0.3 km = ENE NH-60 = 2.8 km = W 12 Railway Station Raniganj RS – 2.8 km – West 13 Fort facility Not Present Within Study Area 14 Airport/Airstrip Kazi Nazrul Islam Airport – 10.5 km – East 15 Interstate Border Not Present Within Study Area 16 R & R issues None 17 Forests & Wildlife issues None 18 Road, Nalla, Transmission Line None diversion issues 19 Litigation / court case is pending Nil

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 161

against the proposed project / proposed site and or any direction passed by the court of law against the project Project Cost The overall estimated project cost for the proposed unit is 171.0 Cr. after expansion. Details are shown below- SL.No Existing Project Cost Expansion Project Cost Total Cost 1 14.68 Cr 156.32 Cr 171.0 Cr Details of Land Use The existing project is located on 5.84 Ha. Additional land requirement for the proposed expansion is 2.46 Ha. Total 8.30 ha land is purchased by the company. The land category is industrial. Table 11:4 Land Break-up SL.No Details Area (Ha) 1 Built-up Area 2.53 2 Storage area for raw material, Products 1.21 3 Greenbelt area 2.74 5 Internal Roads/Open area/Parking/ 1.82 Solid waste storage area Total Land 8.30 Water Requirement & Management No water is required in the sponge iron and steel manufacturing process. Water will be used only for cooling purpose. Total Water requirement will be 574 KLD and will be sourced from Asansol Durgapur Development Authority. Permission for the same has been obtained vide Letter No-ADDA/DGP/ED/CN-65/03-04/924 dated: -27.09.2004. PP has also applied for additional water supply to Asansol Durgapur Development Authority. Table 11:5 Water Requirement Details Particulars Existing Expansion After Expansion (KLD) (KLD) (KLD) DRI Unit 135 135 270 Water for CPP -- 190 190 Billets Production -- 50 50 (Induction Furnace) Rolling Mill -- 50 50 Domestic-Use 6 8 14 Total 141 433 574

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 162

Power Requirement Existing power requirement is 0.6 MW. Additional 20.5 MW power will be required for the expansion project. 15 MW will be sourced form CPP and remaining will be taken from SEB/DVC. Raw Materials Iron ore lumps and dolomite will be purchased from private mines located in Odisha. Coal will be purchased by e-auction from nearby Raniganj coal fields. Depending upon the cost efficacy, coal may be imported from South Africa. Scrap and pig iron is available locally. Iron ore and coal will be transported by rail till Andal siding. From Andal siding, located 5 km away from the project site. From Andal siding it will be carried by trucks. Othe materials like dolomite, scrap and pig iron will be transported by road. Finished product (TMT Bar and Wire Rods will be transported by road. Total road movement will involve 18 trucks (25 Tons capacity). The project site is connected to NH2 (Kolkata-Delhi Grand Trunk road) by a 300 m long, 2 lane industrial road. Material Balance Table 11:6 Material Balance for Sponge Iron (1,20,000 TPA) SL.No INPUT Quantity, TPA OUTPUT Quantity, TPA 1 Iron Ore Lumps 1,80,000 Sponge Iron 1,20,000 2 Coal 132,000 Dolochar 36,000 Dust from ESP/Bag 3 Dolomite 3,600 15,000 filter LOI / Reaction Gases 1,44,000

Accretion 600

Total 3,15,600 Total 3,15,600

Table 11:7 Material Balance for Billets (1,35,000 TPA) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity 1 Sponge Iron 1,20,000 Billets 1,35,000 2 Pig Iron 18,000 Slag 24000 3 Scrap 30,000 LOI and Dust 9500 Total Total 1,68,500 1,68,500

Table 11:8 Material Balance for Rolling Mill (60,000 TPA) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity 1 Billets 64,920 TMT Bars/ Structural steel 60,000 2 Mill scales 1,000 3 End Cuttings 2,320 Total 64,920 Total 64,920

Table 11:9 Material Balance for Power Plant (AFBC Boiler – 30 Ton) SL.No INPUT Quantity OUTPUT Quantity

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 163

1 Coal Imported 10,500 Power 7 MW 2 Dolochar (In-house) 36,000 Ash 22,600 TPA Gases 23,900 TPA Total 46,500 Total 46,500

Waste Water Generation and Treatment  DRI Plant, SMS and Rolling Mill do not require any water for the manufacturing process. Water is required only for cooling purpose.  There is no wastewater discharge from the DRI Plant, as closed circuit cooling towers will be installed.  There is no wastewater discharge from the Induction Furnace, as closed circuit cooling towers will be installed.  Blow down of cooling towers will be taken to tank and reused for dust suppression in raw material unloading yard  There is no wastewater discharge from the Rolling Mill, as the contact cooling water will be recycled via descaling tanks.  Effluent generated from power plant (boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration, cooling tower blow down and plant washings) will be treated in ETP and utilized for dust suppression and ash moistening.  Domestic wastewater from toilets, washroom and canteen will be treated in STP and treated water will be used for greenbelt development.  Storm water drains will be made along the plant boundary. Sedimentation pits will be provided along the storm water drains. The runoff will be discharged to municipal sewer.  Garland drains will be provided along the raw material stock yard. The water will be collected in sedimentation tank, treated and then reused for dust suppression. Solid Waste Management and Disposal Table 11:10 Industrial Waste Management (TPA) S.No Name Quantity, Utilization 1 DRI Char 36,000 100% In power generation Ash/Dust from In civil construction purpose and Will be given 2 15,000 DRI to Brick manufacturers. 3 Kiln Accretion Slag 600 Will be utilized in road construction Slag from SMS will be crushed and iron will be recovered & remaining non-magnetic material will be inert nature and will be used as sub 4 SMS slag 24,000 base material in road construction/ used for brick manufacturing/ civil construction works like PCC and wall construction. Mill scales Will be given to Ferro alloy 5 15,00 from Rolling Mill manufacturing units and used in IF. 6 End Cutting 3,420 Will be recycled to SMS unit 7 Ash from CPP 22,600 Will be given to cement plants/Brick

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 164

manufacturers. MOU has been executed. Hazardous Waste Generation, Storage & Disposal Waste oil: 1.0 KL / Annum This will be stored in covered HDPE drums in a designated area and will be given to WBPCB approved vendors. Manufacturing Process Sponge Iron Refractory lined rotary kilns (1 x 200 TPD) will be added for reduction of iron ore to iron. Coal will be used as reductant and source of heat. Dolomite will be used as flux. A central Burner located at the discharge end will be used for initial heating of the kiln. The cooler discharge material consists of sponge iron lumps, sponge iron fines and char. Magnetic and non-magnetic material will be separated through magnetic separators and stored in separate bins. The hot flue gases will be taken to a Waste Heat Recovery Boilers and after heat recovery they will be treated in high efficiency ESP and discharged into the atmosphere through 70 m tall stack Steel Melting Shop In Steel Melting Shop (SMS), Sponge Iron will be melted along with scrap and pig iron to make liquid steel. Liquid steel will be cast into billets using CCM. The SMS will consist of Induction furnace, Ladles, & Continuous Casting Machine (CCM). There will be three Induction Furnaces, 15 Ton capacity each. Rolling Mill Hot billets will be directly charged into Rolling Mill. Approximately 20% of the billets would be charged into a Methane fired reheating furnace for the heating of billets. A bar and round mill will be installed in the plant to produce TMT Bars/ Structural steel. Power Generation WHRB (Waste Heat Recovery Boiler) 2 x 10 TPH Boilers will be installed for 2 x 100 TPD existing DRI Kiln. 1 x 22 TPH Boiler will be installed for the 200 TPD DRI Kilns. 8 MW electricity will be generated. AFBC (Atmospheric Fluidized Bed Combustion) 1x30 TPH AFBC boiler will be installed to generate 7 MW electricity. Mixed fuel, comprising of mix of dolochar and imported coal will be used in the AFBC boiler. Fly ash and bed ash will be collected in dry form in silos and utilized as per MOEF&CC rule for cement making and brick making. MOU has been done with cement plan and brick plants. High efficiency ESP will be provided to bring down the particulate matter to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and discharged

through 70 m tall stack. In order to control SO2 o 100 mg/Nm3, FGD will be installed. NOx will be controlled using Extra Low NOx burners to 100 mg/Nm3. Mercury will be controlled to 0.03 mg/Nm3 by wet scrubbing (FGD) and by choice of coal having low mercury content.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 165

Employment Generation (Direct & Indirect) Due to the Project. 170 people will get employment during the operation phase of the expansion project 130 people is working in the existing project. During the construction phase of 12 months, 70 persons will get daily employment. 11.2 DESCRIPTION OF BASELINE ENVIRONMENT Air Quality Baseline data was generated during winter-monsoon season from 17th December 2019 to 16th March, 2020 by Envirochek, Kolkata. One-month additional study was generated by GRC during 1st to 31st October 2020 to validate the previous Met data and Air quality data generated by Envirochek. For other parameters fresh data has been generated (once during the post-monsoon period)- 8 noise quality, 8 ground water quality, 8 surface water quality, 4 soil quality, ecology and socio economic data was generated by GRC during the post monsoon season (1st to 31st October 2020). 10 km area around the site was considered as study area. Data was generated by following the standard procedures of the Ministry of Environment Forests and Climate Change and the Central Pollution Control Board. Summary of the baseline data is given below:  The predominant wind direction is from NE.

 PM2.5 was observed in the range of 38.8 – 49.0 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of

PM2.5 was found at Mangalpur industrial estate.

 PM10 was observed in the range of 64.7 – 86 µg/m3. Maximum concentration of PM10 was found at Mangalpur industrial estate.

 SO2 concentration was observed in the range of 6.5 to 12.9 µg/m3, which is well within the standard limit.

 DO: 3.1 – 6.6 mg/L.  COD: 27-55 mg/L.  BOD: 3.0-7.0 mg/L. Noise Quality The noise level study shows that the noise levels are meeting the acceptable norms. The noise levels in the industrial area varies from 68.9 to 73 dBA. At plant boundary it varies from 69.6 to 58.4 dBA. The noise levels in the residential area varies from 44.2 to 53.4 dBA. At SKS school the day time noise level max is 49.3 dBA, which is within the standard of 50 dBA. No national park or wildlife sanctuary or biosphere reserve is present in the study area. No endangered species of flora and fauna is found in the study area. 11.3 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES Prediction of impacts on air quality Parameter Background Predicted MGLC Superimposed NAAQS level, Maximum Maximum Ground Concentration (Nov 2009) Level Concentration SO2 12.9 4.7 17.6 80

NOX 30.0 3.2 33.2 80

PM10 86 3.6 89.6 100

PM2.5 49 1.2 50.2 60

Measures to control Fugitive emissions  The fugitive dust (PM) emissions occur from road, raw material unloading and loading, vehicle movement leading the resuspension of settled dust, etc. Following mitigation measures are recommended for its control:  Apply water to suppress dust generation namely use of Anti-smog guns, Water canons, Water sprinklers and Hydrant and hoses connected to water reservoir/tank  Use of dust suppressants namely liquid polymer emulsion, agglomeration chemicals (lignosulphonates, polyacrylamides), cementitious products like lime and calcium sulphate, Petroleum based emulsions, Chloride salts (Mg and Ca)  Use of scaffolding sheets /nets, wind fencing for dust control  Stabilised concreted earthworks with stone, soil, geotextiles, vegetation, compacting.  Use enclosures – covering for stockpiles – tarpaulin, plastic, fences, screens  Keep proper shape of stockpiles (avoid steep slopes and faces)  Remove muck from truck tyres an under bodies prior to leaving the plant premises  Minimize the drop height of raw materials  All road surfaces for permanent movement of trucks shall be paved (Concreted)  Apply water spray in conjunction with cutting, grinding, drilling  Provide enclosure around mixing process  Use mechanical road sweeping machine for regular cleaning of roads  Use industrial vacuum cleaner for cleaning all shop floors and roofs.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 167

 Monitoring of fugitive dust emissions (at 20 upwind and downwind direction using HVS) Measures to control water pollution  Water required for the proposed expansion will be sourced from ADDA.  DRI Plant, SMS and Rolling Mill do not require any water for the manufacturing process. Water is required only for cooling purpose.  There is no wastewater discharge from the DRI Plant, as closed circuit cooling system will be followed.  There is no wastewater discharge from the Induction Furnace, as closed circuit cooling system will be followed.  Blow down of cooling towers will be taken to tank and reused for dust suppression in raw material unloading yard  There is no wastewater discharge from the Rolling Mill, as the contact cooling water will be recycled via descaling tanks.  Effluent generated from power plant (boiler blow down, DM plant regeneration, cooling tower blow down and plant washings) will be treated in ETP and utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning.  Sanitary wastewater will be treated in STP and treated water will be used for greenbelt development.  Storm water drains will be made along the plant boundary. Sedimentation pits will be provided along the storm water drains. The runoff will be discharged to nearby nalla. Garland drains will be provided along the raw material stock yard. The water will be collected in sedimentation tank, treated and then reused for dust suppression. Hence there will not be any impact on surrounding water bodies due to the proposed expansion project.

Traffic impact

 Regular water sprinkling will be done and all vehicle will be of valid PUC.  Imported Coal will be brought at port through Ship and from there to the plant site by road.  Pucca road exist upto NH # 2, which is at 0.3 kms from the plant site & same is capable of absorbing this additional vehicular traffic.  The high traffic congestion during peak hours only; hence the movement of trucks will be minimized in peak hours.  The commitment “Traffic movement will not be done in Peak hours” will be included in our policy.  All Truck drivers will be trained for the traffic rules and traffic movement.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 168

11.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM Table 11:11 Monitoring Program S.No. Particulars Frequency of Duration of Parameters required to Monitoring sampling be monitored 1. Water & Waste water quality A. Ground Water Once in a month Grab sampling As per IS: 10500 quality in the area. B. Effluent at the inlet Once in a month composite As per EPA Rules, 1996 & outlet of the ETP. sampling (24 (pH, TDS, TSS, Temp, COD, hourly) O&G, Fe, Cr. Pb, Ni, As. C. Sanitary Wastewater Twice in a Composite As per EPA Rules, 1996 (inlet & outlet of month sampling (pH, TSS, BOD, COD, Free STP) Chlorine, ammonia, oil & grease, Coliform count) 2. Air Quality A. Stack Monitoring CEMS (real -- PM2.5, PM10, SO2 & NOx DRI Kiln/ESP/ time, online) WHRB SMS stack B. Ambient Air Quality CAAQMS (real 24 hours, PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and at plant boundary time, online continuous NOx and CO (Admin building) data transmitted to CPCB & SPCS servers) C Ambient Air Quality Twice a weekly 24 hours, PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and Outside the plant monitoring continuous NOx and CO boundary using High (NE, SW and W Volume direction, 1km away samplers from plant boundary)

C. Fugitive emissions Twice in a month 24 hours PM2.5 and PM10 (Process area and 20 m unwind of the RMH Yard) source and downwind of source (raw material unloading, slag crushing, etc) 4. Noise level monitoring Ambient Noise Once in a month 24 hours Noise levels dBA (Leq) levels at 4 sides of plant boundary

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 169

11.5 ADDITIONAL STUDY R&R Existing plant is located at Mangalpur industrial area, Raniganj, WB. The proposed expansion project will be taken up partly in the existing plant premises & also partly in the adjoining land. Total available land is 8.30 Ha. No Rehabilitation and Resettlement is involved in the proposed expansion project. Hence, no R & R study has been carried out. Risk Assessment Equipment Process Potential Safety checks and Mitigation measures Hazard POWER PLANT Coal Storage Fire Coal storage yard will be sprinkled with water to storage of coal keep it moist. shed for 10 days Coal Coal Fire Smoke /heat/Fire detection system handling processi Water sprinkling arrangement bunkers, ng Automatic modular fire extinguisher with pulverizers electronic actuator, Portable CO2 fire extinguishers Boiler Fuel Fire Pressure and temperature detectors with auto burning Explosion release values placed on each boiler. to O2, CO2 and CO- real time monitors, online, produce continuous with alarm systems steam Automatic fire suppression system- activated upon melting of the fuse-able link will activate the system, allowing extinguishable chemicals to flow from the tanks to each extinguishing nozzles. CO2 fire extinguishers, Dry powder fire extinguishers, Generator Convert Mechanical & Layout of Equipment / Machinery will be in Mechani Fire Hazards accordance to factory inspector norms. cal Lube Oil Equipment of BIS specifications energy System into Cable electrica galleries l energy Short circuits Noise Acoustic enclosure Use of ear muffs/ ear plugs Isolated panel rooms Special foundation with vibration absorbers Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 170

Power --- Fire and Fire extinguishers will be placed at strategic Transforme explosion locations rs Automatic modular fire extinguisher with electronic actuator, CO2 fire extinguishers, The area will be isolated with fencing and restricted entry. Switch Yard Transfor Fire All electrical fittings and cables of BIS mer, specifications. Cable Heat/Smoke/Fire detectors placed at strategic galleries locations Automatic modular fire extinguisher with electronic actuator, CO2 fire extinguishers, Compresso Plant Governor The design precautions of safety will be followed r House operatio failure due to in manufacture and erection of compressors. n the failure of pins and springs leading to opening of safety valves STG, draft Noise High Noise Acoustic enclosures will be provided. fans, soot generate Control panel room will be acoustically blowing d due to insulated. from boiler, operatio Administrative controls by use of earmuffs/ear ventilation n of STG, plugs at work area having excessive noise pipes working Enclose ID fans, insulating ventilation pipes of fans, Use of dampeners ventilati Solid vibration free foundations. on system, DRI Plant Coal Fire Burns Water sprinkling system to keep the coal moist storage CO2 fire extinguishers and Dry powder fire yard, day extinguishers bins Sponge Reductio falling of Hot Before opening the kiln bottom door, first clean Iron Kiln n of Iron materials, the inner surface of the stack cap, such that the Ore injury, burns dust particle and hard clinkers which deposited in the cap is fallen into the DSC. Before opening the DSC bottom door check the DSC bar position and condition and clean it if big

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 171

block of castables or any hard clinkers which is blocking the dust flow passage to scrapper chute. Clean the dust by opening the man hole provided in the chute and check the spiking rods and the screen. Allow the scrapper to run to remove the muck, then open the drain pipe of the scrapper, which is located at bottom on either side, pour sufficient water to clean the sludge and the slurry dust to flow through drain pipe. Ensure to stop the scrapper and open the top plate to check the alignment, wear and tear of the plates and take necessary precaution against the excessive worn out plate. Cooler Fall of Burns if the Use of PPE by workers discharge hot DRI materials Water shower, eye wash, first aid box and char comes in contact Magnetic Separati Burns, if the Use of PPE by workers separator on of Hot material Water shower, eye wash, first aid box DRI and comes in Char contact INDUCTION FURNACE Induction Melt Re-circulating Use of PPE by workers Furnaces solid water may Water shower, eye wash, first aid box and CCM charge come in into contact with liquid molten steel steel leading to spurting of metal Lifting of Lifting Spurting of Administrative control and use of PPEs crucible & and molten steel Selection of equipment meeting BIS specs Laddle by tilting Routine repair and maintenance EPT cranes No operating person is allowed at this place during crane operation. RE-HEATING FURNACE Mills Changin Burns, on Administrative control and use of PPEs g the contact with Selection of equipment meeting BIS specs shape of hot rolled Routine repair and maintenance billets products

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 172

Green Belt Development A greenbelt of 2.74 Ha (33.01 %) will be developed in the plant premises. 10 m – 20 m wide greenbelt will be developed around the plant premises. Already planted trees: 1500 Total no of trees to be planted during expansion = 5350 11.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN Environmental Management Plan for effective management of environmental impacts and ensuring overall protection of the environment through appropriate management procedures has been developed. In order to implement the recommended mitigation measures and institutionalize the EMP, budgetary provision of Rs794.5 Lakhs capital expenditure has been made. Recurring annual expenditure will be Rs 177.5 lakhs of the capital expenditure. Environment Management Cell (EMC) will ensure that all air pollution control device, effluent treatment plants and water re-circulating systems function effectively. EMC will also supervise disposal of spent oil and lubricants and used batteries to the authorized vendors. Plantation will be started during the construction phase by following the guidelines issued by the Central Pollution Control Board. Schemes for resource conservation (raw materials, water, etc), rainwater harvesting and social forestry development will be taken up by EMC. Regular environmental awareness programs for the employees will be conducted. 11.7 OVERALL JUSTIFICATION FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THE PROJRCT  Local people will get direct financial benefit by way of employment.  Local people will get contracts for supply and services and get indirect employment.  More revenue will be generated by the way of GST to the State & Central Govt. The operation of plant has significant positive impact on the socio-economic environment of the area. The technology involved in the project is well proven and reliable. Many plants are operating all over the country and pollution control technology is available and discharge standards are notified. For O&M of the plant, experienced Engineers/Technicians are available in the region. In view of the above the proposed project could be considered for grant of EC. ------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 173

CHAPTER-12 : DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED

12.1 GENERAL M/s Satyam Iron & Steel Co. Pvt Ltd has appointed M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd., for carrying out this Environmental Impact Assessment Study as per the EIA notification, 2006 as amended till date. M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd has approved EIA coordinators and Field Area Experts for undertaking Environmental and related studies in Eighteen (18) approved sectors by NABET, Quality Council of India, New Delhi. 12.2 INTRODUCTION OF ORGANIZATION GRC India is an ISO 9001:2015, 14001:2015 & ISO 45000:2018 certified pioneer environmental consultancy organisation in India. It has been accredited by National Accreditation Board of Education & Training (NABET), Quality Council of India (QCI), which is the highest accreditation authority in India. Accreditation is the formal recognition by an accreditation authority to carry out a specific service in accordance with the standards and technical regulations as prescribed in the scope of accreditation. The accreditation permits the organisation to carry out the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Studies for obtaining an Environmental Clearance for various development projects. This has been granted following a rigorous inspection based on a number of quality parameters applicable to concerned Environmental Functional Areas and the required infrastructure facilities available in the organisation, as prescribed by the MoEF&CC, Govt. of India in its guidelines. The accreditation certificate number NABET/EIA/1821/SA 0110 is valid till 9th August 2021. Copy of NABET certificate is attached as Annexure-VI with EIA report. Current Status of ACO is available on below given link:- http://eia.nabet.qci.org.in/Accredited_EIA_Consultant.aspx 12.3 ADDRESS & CONTACTS Corporate Office F-374 and 375, Sector – 63, Noida-201301, UP Phone: 91-120-4044630, 4044660, 4323120 Fax: 91-120-2406519 E-Mail: [email protected]

Registered Office Unit No.102, First Floor, Vardhman Mayur Market, CSC-1, Mayur Vihar Phase 3, New Delhi – 110096, Ph: 91-11-22622031,

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 174

12.4 EIA CORDINATOR AND TEAM MEMBER The EIA/EMP report has been prepared under the guidance of following Coordinators & Functional Area Experts: Coordinated the EIA Study and instructed EIA Dr J.K Moitra FAE’s and PA’s for proper data generation, Coordinator assessment and report writing  Identifying the sources of emissions and mitigation measures.  Inventorisation of point source stack Dr. J.K Moitra emission details. FAE-AP  Site specific micrometeorology Dr Dhiraj Kr Singh monitoring.  Ambient Air Quality (AAQ)monitoring impact predictions and mitigations  Surface water and ground water quality monitoring and assessment. impacts on water Dr Dhiraj Kr Singh/ FAE-WP  Environment and mitigations. Sonu  Identification, characterization of effluent streams and treatments thereof.  Water balance and conservation measures  Visited the site and surroundings, assessed the meteorological data, did predictions on FAE-AQ Dr. J.K Moitra air quality and suggested mitigation measures.  Biological environment status in respect of FAE-EB Dr Ashok Kr Rathore terrestrial fauna and aquatic eco system.  Impact on ecological environment.  Determination of baseline human environment. FAE-SE Mr B.N Chaudhari  Impact on socioeconomic environment & mitigation methods.  Ground water resource assessment.  Impact on ground water potential and FAE-HG Prof. Tapan Majumder mitigation measures for avoiding ground water contamination.  Topography and geological aspects FAE-GEO Prof. Tapan Majumder  Developing geological maps  Visited the site and surroundings, assessed the process details, identified risks / FAE-RH Dr. J.K Moitra hazards and suggested mitigation measures.  Non-hazardous solid, wastes generation, recycling and disposal. FAE-SHW Dr. J.K Moitra  Storage and management of hazardous solid waste  Monitoring, analysis & characterization of FAE- SC Mr. N P S Varde soil.

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 175

 Assessment of impact on soil quality and mitigation measures.  Analysis of ambient noise quality data. Mr Dwarka Prasad FAE – NV  Impact due to plant noise and abatement Biswari measures.  Analysis of data related to land-use pattern. Mr. N P S Varde /Mr. B FAE – LU  Land-use map development. N Chaudhari  Impact on land environment in respect to land form change Apart from EIA Coordinator and FAE’s involved in the project the other technical staff involved in the preparation of EIA/EMP are listed below:- Under Name of Internal Activity / Involvement – Actual Work Approved Team Member Area Performed Expert Understanding of project; Guidance in writing and modification in Mr D.P Biswari Over All -- Contents; Impact Assessment; Review of EIA/EMP report. EIA Report Coordination for data collection, Help Writing in EIA/EMP documentation. Mr. Sonu (FAE Cat-B) FAE-WP Assisted FAE for identification of WP impacts and mitigation measures.

12.5 LABORATORY INVOLVED FOR BASELINE MONITORING AND OTHER ANALYSIS Baseline Monitoring during 17th Dec-2019 to 16th March-2020 and Analysis has been done by M/s. Envirocheck, 63/B, Rastraguru Avenue, Kolkata. Accredited by NABL, JSPCB & WBPCB also Recognized by MoEF&CC, New Delhi in accordance with the Guidelines for EIA issued by the Ministry of Environment Forests and Climate Change, Govt. of India. One month additional study for Air, Surface Water, Ground Water, Soil and Noise environment monitoring also has been done during 1st Oct 2020 to 31st Oct 2020 by M/s GRC India Training & Analytical Laboratory (A Unit of GRC India Pvt Ltd) Accredited by NABL and Recognized by MoEFCC, New Delhi.

------x------

Consultant-M/s GRC India Pvt Ltd Page 176